Short section, needs complete re-write, much already written elsewhere in HYLT / JG
1.1 What is XXXX?
Revising – Making improvements
There’s more to Revising than you might have thought and it’s not about revising for an exam! A well formed Revising habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:
self-monitor how things are going and keeping an eye on the goal
expecting the unexpected
being willing to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances
remain alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas
look at what you are doing with a critical eye
strive to be the best you can be
make sure things are on track and
make improvements along the way.
It’s all about being adaptable, flexible and open to change.
1.2 What does being a good reviser involve?
Being ready, willing and able
Revising is about the way we work on something to improve it. Whether it be icing a cake, solving a tricky maths problem or creating a well-crafted essay, all require effort, retries and determination to satisfy ourselves that the result pleases us. How we tackle such a job isn’t just a case of monitoring as we go along or reviewing the result: it will be influenced by other qualities. Our attitude to change, whether we have a sense of quality and what sort of validation we need. The growth chart in section 2 intertwines these important contributors to our growth in the habit of Revising.
Being a good reviser involves:
self-monitoring how things are going, keeping an eye on the goal;
expecting the unexpected, being ready to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances;
staying alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas;
looking at what you are doing with a critical eye;
striving to be the best you can be;
making sure things are on track and making improvements along the way.
1.3 Spot yourself revising in lessons
Just to get you tuned in – have a quick think about your revising habits at this stage. Use the chart alongside, take it with you into lessons and make a note of whether and how often you display these characteristics.
Take the outcomes of this little questionnaire into account when you tackle section 2.
1.4 What teachers can do to help you become a good reviser
Your teachers will:
encourage you to change the way you are doing things if necessary
help you to view change as a natural part of learning
want you to view making corrections as an opportunity to improve
focus their feedback on what you need to do to improve, rather than simply praising what you got right
offer you checklists that help you to keep an eye on how your work is progressing
create opportunities for you to stop and to consider how things are going
Good revisers have had to learn how to deal with change, both emotionally and practically. If you just want or like things to stay the same you are unlikely to recognise the need to change your ideas or the way you do something.
As a good reviser you’ll also need to know what ‘good’ looks like; how to keep an eye on how things are going and be willing to evaluate how good things are against external standards. Growing your revising habits is much more than you ‘having another go’.
However well prepared learners are, they have to expect the unexpected. They have to have the readiness to revise as they go along. Good learners are able to change their plans and think on their feet. They are able to be flexible. To be effective at revising, learners need to monitor how things are going and periodically review where they have got to.
Monitoring is the art of looking over your own shoulder as you’re working away at a problem, asking yourself how it’s going.
Getting better at monitoring (‘reflection in action’) involves cultivating the little voice of self-awareness that keeps the strategic goals in mind, and is ready to change tack if it seems appropriate. A teacher who decides to throw away the lesson plan on the spur of the moment and go with the interesting discussion which is developing, is monitoring. Students can pick up the habit from people who can model it; who have learnt how to learn aloud, i.e. to externalise the thought processes of the vigilant monitor.
Reviewing (‘reflection on action’) means stopping every so often to take stock of progress, and to ensure that any emerging product—an artwork, an essay, a draft business plan—is on track. Reviewing requires the ability to look at your own work with the critical eye of an editor, and not be afraid of the possibility that some corrections may be needed. A writer may put a piece of work aside for a while and then come back to look at it afresh. An athlete may sit down and look at the video of her starting technique to see if any adjustments need to be made. But reviewing is what the low-achieving maths student, for example, is very often unable to do.
Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002
1b) What does being a good Reviser involve?
A well formed Revising habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:
Self-monitor how things are going, keeping an eye on the goal
Expect the unexpected, having a readiness to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances.
Remain alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas
Look at what you are doing with a critical eye
Strive to be the best you can be
Make sure things are on track and make improvements along the way.
So at a less abstract level, students need to learn how to deal with change, emotionally and practically. With an inflexible frame of mind they are unlikely to recognise the need to change their ideas or the way they do something. They also need to know what ‘good’ looks like; how to keep an eye on how things are going and the willingness to evaluate how things went against external standards. When looked at from these diverse angles, growing revising moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘have another go’.
The Revising grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Revising
Our progression grid for Revising has 6 components:
Revising is about the way we work on something to improve it. Whether it be icing a cake, solving a tricky maths problem or creating a well-crafted essay, all require effort, retries and determination to satisfy ourselves that the result pleases us. How we tackle such a job isn’t just a case of monitoring as we go along or reviewing the result: it will be influenced by other qualities. Our attitude to change, whether we have a sense of quality and what sort of validation we need. The grid intertwines these important contributors to our growth in the habit of Revising.
The learning guru Royce Sadler put it like this: “Students need to be able to judge the quality of what they are producing and be able to regulate what they are doing during the doing itself”.
Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about
1) Attitude to change
How we relate to the change process
For many of us, doing things differently is scary and only for the bold and confident. But if we want students to enjoy achieving their best learning outcomes, we need to scaffold that process by building confidence – helping students move beyond their comfort zone and becoming more flexible as a learner. In the early phases students adapt what they are doing because they are being told and/or supported to do so. But this support pays off at the ‘value’ phase (green) when students feel positive about their efforts and realise learning is all about rethinking and adjusting and redoing, rather than getting it right first time. By the ‘organises’ phase (yellow), students are ready, willing, and able to move beyond making relatively small changes to making wholesale changes or starting again on a different tack.
2) Sense of standards
How we relate to standards of excellence, quality, and correctness
The next contributory factor in revising what we are doing has to do with how we view quality; whether we have a sense of standards; our view of what’s good, bad or indifferent. In the early phases students accept what they are told about by teachers; what something needs to look like, be like, feel like. Schools are full of them – objectives, criteria, steps to success, outcomes – and constantly trying to achieve them can be dispiriting. But with support and encouragement students are able to begin to think for themselves what makes something good and determine their own standards.
3) Self-talk
The voice of self awareness
Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to standards, others to self-monitoring, or flexibility. All such self-talk is important in building a revising habit.
4) Reflection IN action
Checking of how things are going
This column is about how we monitor what’s happening as we go along; keeping a weather eye on how things are going. Students need help to do this well. They need to know what they are looking for, what they are tracking. Should they look for good things or bad, for feelings, for whether they understand…? It’s a minefield. The early phases shown here relate to monitoring what you are doing against known criteria, and checking the process of doing something itself. Students need these props in the early phases. It’s only in the ‘valuing’ ( green) phase that they become skilled at editing as they go along, having had practice with checklists and criteria in earlier phases.
Look particularly at the difference between ‘value’ and ‘organised’. In the ‘value’ phase the amends, revisions, and re-tries are being done with the original aim/goal/ objective in mind. In the ‘organised’ phase students are prepared to ditch the original plan, ask hard questions, change the rules and change direction. It’s a big and important shift in becoming an independent learner.
5) Reflection ON action
The inclination to reflect on what we have achieved
This is the essence of learning from experience although sadly it is not a common inclination. The key here is not simply reflecting on what happened and whether we could have improved, but whether we take heed of such lessons and behave differently next time. This is not a natural skill and will need careful structuring and nurturing. Notice that the early phases are about what happened and are heavily scaffolded. By green students are asking why they did it that way, and by yellow they are challenging those familiar ways of working and rethinking the how in order to achieve better outcomes. It’s a breakout moment.
6) Recognising external validation
How we relate to external validation.
The last constituent of revising has to do with how we need and use external validation – the need for a legitimate authority source to confirm that what we are doing is right. When we are chasing facts we need to be sure they are correct. When we are using standards we need to be sure they are sound. In the early phases this authority normally comes from parents and teachers. As students move through the phases there is a move to seeking out experts, dictionaries and original sources. (The internet invariably plays a role here but while it might be a great place to start it’s a terrible place to finish! It needs to be used with discernment.) Sources of legitimate authority plays into how we revise and improve our learning.
What do you think?
What have you learned about revising from these descriptions?
What have you had confirmed?
What surprised you?
How have your views changed?
Make a note of…
Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
Which column your students are most secure in.
1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Revising.
Of course the development of revising does not grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.
Here is our interpretation of how Revising might grow.
The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.
Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to. Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly. Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure. Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively. Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.
We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.
Lacks: Minded to ‘just do things’
In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are not necessarily aware of doing things well or differently. Once they get going on something they may change it but more for the joy of just doing it. Outcomes maybe rushed or lack finesse, but once completed there may be little interest in revisiting it or in any comments they are offered. External standards are not yet a feature of their world.
Receives: Minded to check what they do.
In the Receives (purple) phase, students begin to make checks on how they are doing against given criteria when prompted. They can talk about what they did and sometimes how. They rely on their teachers or parents to validate what they do/have done.
Responds: Minded to understand standards.
In the Responds (blue) phase students have overcome a fear of mistakes and are more able and willing to monitor what they are doing. They begin to develop the idea of ‘good’ themselves and to understand why given standards are important. They respond positively to supportive feedback and talk reflectively about how they could improve with encouragement.
Values: Minded to value revising
In the Values (green) phase, students understand the importance of keeping a close eye on progress in order to achieve high-quality outcomes that meet their goals. They see the point in making changes in the light of the original goal or external standard or internal feedback. They understand the need to learn from previous experiences and realise that learning is all about changing understandings; not just knowing stuff. In so doing they widen the scope of external validation.
Organises: Minded to actively seek alternative strategies
In the Organises (yellow) phase revising has become a skilful habit; where revising itself raises more questions than answers. Yes, progress is kept under review but now students question the original goal of the activity. They look more widely for validation and may well change to a more productive strategy or a different goal. They use critical feedback positively and are keen to look back on what and how they achieved what they did in order to learn from the experience.
Embodies: Minded to exploit previous experience to the full
In the Embodies (orange) phase, students make ongoing checks and amends, and major rethinking, in order to meet their own, often more exacting, standards of achievement. Now they tend not to need the validation of others (marks, grades, exams, quality feedback) because their own critical sense of standards acts as their barometer. They adapt readily to changing circumstances and always reflect on what and how they have done something with the explicit intention of doing it better, more efficiently / differently in the future.
What do you think?
What has struck you about the act of revising having read the descriptions above?
Which phase do you operate in?
What makes you say that?
Make a note of…
What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their revising behaviour.
Any practical ideas the text has triggered.
Preparation for the Learning Team meeting
Where are my students now?
Take a look at the Revising progression chart in your Learning Diary or
Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
However well prepared learners are, they have to expect the unexpected. They have to have the readiness to revise as they go along. Good learners are able to change their plans and think on their feet. They are able to be flexible. To be effective at revising, learners need to monitor how things are going and periodically review where they have got to.
Monitoring is the art of looking over your own shoulder as you’re working away at a problem, asking yourself how it’s going.
Getting better at monitoring (‘reflection in action’) involves cultivating the little voice of self-awareness that keeps the strategic goals in mind, and is ready to change tack if it seems appropriate. A teacher who decides to throw away the lesson plan on the spur of the moment and go with the interesting discussion which is developing, is monitoring. Students can pick up the habit from people who can model it; who have learnt how to learn aloud, i.e. to externalise the thought processes of the vigilant monitor.
Reviewing (‘reflection on action’) means stopping every so often to take stock of progress, and to ensure that any emerging product—an artwork, an essay, a draft business plan—is on track. Reviewing requires the ability to look at your own work with the critical eye of an editor, and not be afraid of the possibility that some corrections may be needed. A writer may put a piece of work aside for a while and then come back to look at it afresh. An athlete may sit down and look at the video of her starting technique to see if any adjustments need to be made. But reviewing is what the low-achieving maths student, for example, is very often unable to do.
Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002
1b) What does being a good Reviser involve?
A well formed Revising habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:
Self-monitor how things are going, keeping an eye on the goal
Expect the unexpected, having a readiness to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances.
Remain alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas
Look at what you are doing with a critical eye
Strive to be the best you can be
Make sure things are on track and make improvements along the way.
So at a less abstract level, students need to learn how to deal with change, emotionally and practically. With an inflexible frame of mind they are unlikely to recognise the need to change their ideas or the way they do something. They also need to know what ‘good’ looks like; how to keep an eye on how things are going and the willingness to evaluate how things went against external standards. When looked at from these diverse angles, growing revising moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘have another go’.
The Revising grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Revising
Our progression grid for Revising has 6 components:
Revising is about the way we work on something to improve it. Whether it be icing a cake, solving a tricky maths problem or creating a well-crafted essay, all require effort, retries and determination to satisfy ourselves that the result pleases us. How we tackle such a job isn’t just a case of monitoring as we go along or reviewing the result: it will be influenced by other qualities. Our attitude to change, whether we have a sense of quality and what sort of validation we need. The grid intertwines these important contributors to our growth in the habit of Revising.
The learning guru Royce Sadler put it like this: “Students need to be able to judge the quality of what they are producing and be able to regulate what they are doing during the doing itself”.
Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about
1) Attitude to change
How we relate to the change process
For many of us, doing things differently is scary and only for the bold and confident. But if we want students to enjoy achieving their best learning outcomes, we need to scaffold that process by building confidence – helping students move beyond their comfort zone and becoming more flexible as a learner. In the early phases students adapt what they are doing because they are being told and/or supported to do so. But this support pays off at the ‘value’ phase (green) when students feel positive about their efforts and realise learning is all about rethinking and adjusting and redoing, rather than getting it right first time. By the ‘organises’ phase (yellow), students are ready, willing, and able to move beyond making relatively small changes to making wholesale changes or starting again on a different tack.
2) Sense of standards
How we relate to standards of excellence, quality, and correctness
The next contributory factor in revising what we are doing has to do with how we view quality; whether we have a sense of standards; our view of what’s good, bad or indifferent. In the early phases students accept what they are told about by teachers; what something needs to look like, be like, feel like. Schools are full of them – objectives, criteria, steps to success, outcomes – and constantly trying to achieve them can be dispiriting. But with support and encouragement students are able to begin to think for themselves what makes something good and determine their own standards.
3) Self-talk
The voice of self awareness
Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to standards, others to self-monitoring, or flexibility. All such self-talk is important in building a revising habit.
4) Reflection IN action
Checking of how things are going
This column is about how we monitor what’s happening as we go along; keeping a weather eye on how things are going. Students need help to do this well. They need to know what they are looking for, what they are tracking. Should they look for good things or bad, for feelings, for whether they understand…? It’s a minefield. The early phases shown here relate to monitoring what you are doing against known criteria, and checking the process of doing something itself. Students need these props in the early phases. It’s only in the ‘valuing’ ( green) phase that they become skilled at editing as they go along, having had practice with checklists and criteria in earlier phases.
Look particularly at the difference between ‘value’ and ‘organised’. In the ‘value’ phase the amends, revisions, and re-tries are being done with the original aim/goal/ objective in mind. In the ‘organised’ phase students are prepared to ditch the original plan, ask hard questions, change the rules and change direction. It’s a big and important shift in becoming an independent learner.
5) Reflection ON action
The inclination to reflect on what we have achieved
This is the essence of learning from experience although sadly it is not a common inclination. The key here is not simply reflecting on what happened and whether we could have improved, but whether we take heed of such lessons and behave differently next time. This is not a natural skill and will need careful structuring and nurturing. Notice that the early phases are about what happened and are heavily scaffolded. By green students are asking why they did it that way, and by yellow they are challenging those familiar ways of working and rethinking the how in order to achieve better outcomes. It’s a breakout moment.
6) Recognising external validation
How we relate to external validation.
The last constituent of revising has to do with how we need and use external validation – the need for a legitimate authority source to confirm that what we are doing is right. When we are chasing facts we need to be sure they are correct. When we are using standards we need to be sure they are sound. In the early phases this authority normally comes from parents and teachers. As students move through the phases there is a move to seeking out experts, dictionaries and original sources. (The internet invariably plays a role here but while it might be a great place to start it’s a terrible place to finish! It needs to be used with discernment.) Sources of legitimate authority plays into how we revise and improve our learning.
What do you think?
What have you learned about revising from these descriptions?
What have you had confirmed?
What surprised you?
How have your views changed?
Make a note of…
Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
Which column your students are most secure in.
1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Revising.
Of course the development of revising does not grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.
Here is our interpretation of how Revising might grow.
The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.
Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to. Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly. Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure. Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively. Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.
We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.
Lacks: Minded to ‘just do things’
In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are not necessarily aware of doing things well or differently. Once they get going on something they may change it but more for the joy of just doing it. Outcomes maybe rushed or lack finesse, but once completed there may be little interest in revisiting it or in any comments they are offered. External standards are not yet a feature of their world.
Receives: Minded to check what they do.
In the Receives (purple) phase, students begin to make checks on how they are doing against given criteria when prompted. They can talk about what they did and sometimes how. They rely on their teachers or parents to validate what they do/have done.
Responds: Minded to understand standards.
In the Responds (blue) phase students have overcome a fear of mistakes and are more able and willing to monitor what they are doing. They begin to develop the idea of ‘good’ themselves and to understand why given standards are important. They respond positively to supportive feedback and talk reflectively about how they could improve with encouragement.
Values: Minded to value revising
In the Values (green) phase, students understand the importance of keeping a close eye on progress in order to achieve high-quality outcomes that meet their goals. They see the point in making changes in the light of the original goal or external standard or internal feedback. They understand the need to learn from previous experiences and realise that learning is all about changing understandings; not just knowing stuff. In so doing they widen the scope of external validation.
Organises: Minded to actively seek alternative strategies
In the Organises (yellow) phase revising has become a skilful habit; where revising itself raises more questions than answers. Yes, progress is kept under review but now students question the original goal of the activity. They look more widely for validation and may well change to a more productive strategy or a different goal. They use critical feedback positively and are keen to look back on what and how they achieved what they did in order to learn from the experience.
Embodies: Minded to exploit previous experience to the full
In the Embodies (orange) phase, students make ongoing checks and amends, and major rethinking, in order to meet their own, often more exacting, standards of achievement. Now they tend not to need the validation of others (marks, grades, exams, quality feedback) because their own critical sense of standards acts as their barometer. They adapt readily to changing circumstances and always reflect on what and how they have done something with the explicit intention of doing it better, more efficiently / differently in the future.
What do you think?
What has struck you about the act of revising having read the descriptions above?
Which phase do you operate in?
What makes you say that?
Make a note of…
What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their revising behaviour.
Any practical ideas the text has triggered.
Preparation for the Learning Team meeting
Where are my students now?
Take a look at the Revising progression chart in your Learning Diary or
Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
However well prepared learners are, they have to expect the unexpected. They have to have the readiness to revise as they go along. Good learners are able to change their plans and think on their feet. They are able to be flexible. To be effective at revising, learners need to monitor how things are going and periodically review where they have got to.
Monitoring is the art of looking over your own shoulder as you’re working away at a problem, asking yourself how it’s going.
Getting better at monitoring (‘reflection in action’) involves cultivating the little voice of self-awareness that keeps the strategic goals in mind, and is ready to change tack if it seems appropriate. A teacher who decides to throw away the lesson plan on the spur of the moment and go with the interesting discussion which is developing, is monitoring. Students can pick up the habit from people who can model it; who have learnt how to learn aloud, i.e. to externalise the thought processes of the vigilant monitor.
Reviewing (‘reflection on action’) means stopping every so often to take stock of progress, and to ensure that any emerging product—an artwork, an essay, a draft business plan—is on track. Reviewing requires the ability to look at your own work with the critical eye of an editor, and not be afraid of the possibility that some corrections may be needed. A writer may put a piece of work aside for a while and then come back to look at it afresh. An athlete may sit down and look at the video of her starting technique to see if any adjustments need to be made. But reviewing is what the low-achieving maths student, for example, is very often unable to do.
Extract from Building Learning Power. Guy Claxton 2002
1b) What does being a good Reviser involve?
A well formed Revising habit involves being ready, willing, and able to:
Self-monitor how things are going, keeping an eye on the goal
Expect the unexpected, having a readiness to re-shape, re-order, re-form plans to take account of new circumstances.
Remain alive to new, unforeseen opportunities and ideas
Look at what you are doing with a critical eye
Strive to be the best you can be
Make sure things are on track and make improvements along the way.
So at a less abstract level, students need to learn how to deal with change, emotionally and practically. With an inflexible frame of mind they are unlikely to recognise the need to change their ideas or the way they do something. They also need to know what ‘good’ looks like; how to keep an eye on how things are going and the willingness to evaluate how things went against external standards. When looked at from these diverse angles, growing revising moves well beyond encouraging a student to ‘have another go’.
The Revising grid below takes account of the constituent parts of building the habit of Revising
Our progression grid for Revising has 6 components:
Revising is about the way we work on something to improve it. Whether it be icing a cake, solving a tricky maths problem or creating a well-crafted essay, all require effort, retries and determination to satisfy ourselves that the result pleases us. How we tackle such a job isn’t just a case of monitoring as we go along or reviewing the result: it will be influenced by other qualities. Our attitude to change, whether we have a sense of quality and what sort of validation we need. The grid intertwines these important contributors to our growth in the habit of Revising.
The learning guru Royce Sadler put it like this: “Students need to be able to judge the quality of what they are producing and be able to regulate what they are doing during the doing itself”.
Take a closer look at what each column of the grid is about
1) Attitude to change
How we relate to the change process
For many of us, doing things differently is scary and only for the bold and confident. But if we want students to enjoy achieving their best learning outcomes, we need to scaffold that process by building confidence – helping students move beyond their comfort zone and becoming more flexible as a learner. In the early phases students adapt what they are doing because they are being told and/or supported to do so. But this support pays off at the ‘value’ phase (green) when students feel positive about their efforts and realise learning is all about rethinking and adjusting and redoing, rather than getting it right first time. By the ‘organises’ phase (yellow), students are ready, willing, and able to move beyond making relatively small changes to making wholesale changes or starting again on a different tack.
2) Sense of standards
How we relate to standards of excellence, quality, and correctness
The next contributory factor in revising what we are doing has to do with how we view quality; whether we have a sense of standards; our view of what’s good, bad or indifferent. In the early phases students accept what they are told about by teachers; what something needs to look like, be like, feel like. Schools are full of them – objectives, criteria, steps to success, outcomes – and constantly trying to achieve them can be dispiriting. But with support and encouragement students are able to begin to think for themselves what makes something good and determine their own standards.
3) Self-talk
The voice of self awareness
Self-talk is what we say to ourselves as we learn. The statements capture what someone in each phase of the grid would be thinking. Students may use some of these phrases when talking with you, or in writing from time to time, but mostly self-talk goes on inside their heads. We have shown a small flavour of self-talk thoughts that teachers can encourage students to imitate. Some relate to standards, others to self-monitoring, or flexibility. All such self-talk is important in building a revising habit.
4) Reflection IN action
Checking of how things are going
This column is about how we monitor what’s happening as we go along; keeping a weather eye on how things are going. Students need help to do this well. They need to know what they are looking for, what they are tracking. Should they look for good things or bad, for feelings, for whether they understand…? It’s a minefield. The early phases shown here relate to monitoring what you are doing against known criteria, and checking the process of doing something itself. Students need these props in the early phases. It’s only in the ‘valuing’ ( green) phase that they become skilled at editing as they go along, having had practice with checklists and criteria in earlier phases.
Look particularly at the difference between ‘value’ and ‘organised’. In the ‘value’ phase the amends, revisions, and re-tries are being done with the original aim/goal/ objective in mind. In the ‘organised’ phase students are prepared to ditch the original plan, ask hard questions, change the rules and change direction. It’s a big and important shift in becoming an independent learner.
5) Reflection ON action
The inclination to reflect on what we have achieved
This is the essence of learning from experience although sadly it is not a common inclination. The key here is not simply reflecting on what happened and whether we could have improved, but whether we take heed of such lessons and behave differently next time. This is not a natural skill and will need careful structuring and nurturing. Notice that the early phases are about what happened and are heavily scaffolded. By green students are asking why they did it that way, and by yellow they are challenging those familiar ways of working and rethinking the how in order to achieve better outcomes. It’s a breakout moment.
6) Recognising external validation
How we relate to external validation.
The last constituent of revising has to do with how we need and use external validation – the need for a legitimate authority source to confirm that what we are doing is right. When we are chasing facts we need to be sure they are correct. When we are using standards we need to be sure they are sound. In the early phases this authority normally comes from parents and teachers. As students move through the phases there is a move to seeking out experts, dictionaries and original sources. (The internet invariably plays a role here but while it might be a great place to start it’s a terrible place to finish! It needs to be used with discernment.) Sources of legitimate authority plays into how we revise and improve our learning.
What do you think?
What have you learned about revising from these descriptions?
What have you had confirmed?
What surprised you?
How have your views changed?
Make a note of…
Any ideas for practical classroom experiments that these descriptions have triggered
Which column your students are most secure in.
1d) Unpicking the rows; getting better at Revising.
Of course the development of revising does not grow neatly up each column or evenly across the phases in the grid. The five broad phases of dispositional growth (purple – orange) are affective ways in which people may be inclined to behave: we call this inclination ‘mindedness’.
Here is our interpretation of how Revising might grow.
The phases are drawn from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain.
Phase ‘Receives’ (purple) is about doing something because you are told or expected to. Phase ‘Responds’ (blue) is about gaining interest and doing things more willingly. Phase ‘Values’ (green) is a key phase since the student now sees the value of behaving in this way. It’s a win for them; to behave like this is in their interest. It’s in this phase that the behaviour becomes more secure. Phase ‘Organises’ (yellow) is the phase in which the student capitalises on this ‘in their interest’ behaviour and gets themselves organised to use it positively. Phase ‘Embodies’ (orange), known as ‘characterised’ in the original taxonomy. In this phase the student has made this behaviour their own. It has become part of their character; they can’t not do it and they have become highly skilled in doing it.
We urge you to see this progression as long term. Some phases will take years for people to work through; some will never be worked through. None of the phases are inevitable. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless the role of a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.
Lacks: Minded to ‘just do things’
In this ‘Lacks’ (grey) phase, students are not necessarily aware of doing things well or differently. Once they get going on something they may change it but more for the joy of just doing it. Outcomes maybe rushed or lack finesse, but once completed there may be little interest in revisiting it or in any comments they are offered. External standards are not yet a feature of their world.
Receives: Minded to check what they do.
In the Receives (purple) phase, students begin to make checks on how they are doing against given criteria when prompted. They can talk about what they did and sometimes how. They rely on their teachers or parents to validate what they do/have done.
Responds: Minded to understand standards.
In the Responds (blue) phase students have overcome a fear of mistakes and are more able and willing to monitor what they are doing. They begin to develop the idea of ‘good’ themselves and to understand why given standards are important. They respond positively to supportive feedback and talk reflectively about how they could improve with encouragement.
Values: Minded to value revising
In the Values (green) phase, students understand the importance of keeping a close eye on progress in order to achieve high-quality outcomes that meet their goals. They see the point in making changes in the light of the original goal or external standard or internal feedback. They understand the need to learn from previous experiences and realise that learning is all about changing understandings; not just knowing stuff. In so doing they widen the scope of external validation.
Organises: Minded to actively seek alternative strategies
In the Organises (yellow) phase revising has become a skilful habit; where revising itself raises more questions than answers. Yes, progress is kept under review but now students question the original goal of the activity. They look more widely for validation and may well change to a more productive strategy or a different goal. They use critical feedback positively and are keen to look back on what and how they achieved what they did in order to learn from the experience.
Embodies: Minded to exploit previous experience to the full
In the Embodies (orange) phase, students make ongoing checks and amends, and major rethinking, in order to meet their own, often more exacting, standards of achievement. Now they tend not to need the validation of others (marks, grades, exams, quality feedback) because their own critical sense of standards acts as their barometer. They adapt readily to changing circumstances and always reflect on what and how they have done something with the explicit intention of doing it better, more efficiently / differently in the future.
What do you think?
What has struck you about the act of revising having read the descriptions above?
Which phase do you operate in?
What makes you say that?
Make a note of…
What you might do to assist your students to make headway in their revising behaviour.
Any practical ideas the text has triggered.
Preparation for the Learning Team meeting
Where are my students now?
Take a look at the Revising progression chart in your Learning Diary or
Colour in the cells where you think your students are secure.
Some will barely be on the chart while others may be quite a way up. Neat straight lines of secure behaviours are rare. But looking at your students in this way should give you an idea of what you need to work on.
Draw a red line across the chart to denote where you think most of the school’s students could and should reach by the time they leave.
Please take the results of these tasks with you to the Professional Learning Team session shown in Section 4
Celebrating learning: the outward signs of the values that underpin the culture, making learning the object of attention. In this dimension common notions of classroom learning are flipped or re-defined – being stuck is seen as interesting and mistakes valuable. Effort, questioning and taking risks are recognised, attended to, acknowledged and praised. These and the recognition of the development of learning habits serve to make visible and public the underlying values of the learning friendly environment.
‘The biggest effects on learning occur when teachers become learners of their own teaching, and students become their own teachers’ (Hattie).
Finding your way through this section
In Section 5 we unpack Celebrating learning: the outward signs of the culture values
Back in Section 1 you estimated where your practice was. Here you look not only at your practice but at the impact of that practice on students (see Section 5.2)
Recalculate where your practice lies for;
growing learning habits (section 5.3)
re-defining failure (section 5.4)
learning on display (section 5.5)
Scan through these sections, without detouring into toggle boxes, and look for the stage where you think your practice lies;
1 introduce (Foundational Four behaviours)
2 expand (the range of behaviours being used)
3 deepen (use of all the behaviours)
4 widen (how the behaviours are used)
5 enrich
Take a detailed look at practical ideas for your current stage of practice and the one above.
Use the ideas, and those signalled in other BLP online modules, to further grow your classroom practice.
As the culture of the classroom shifts from a focus on performance to a focus on learning, and as learning itself is re-defined / perceived as an uncertain, error-strewn journey, so learners come to understand and act on the fact that learning is itself a learnable craft.
1. Three ways of celebrating learning
In this section we reach down into the mechanics of teaching and learning to find things that matter. Celebrating Learning includes how teachers praise, display and celebrate learning so as to progressively build learning behaviours by:
re-defining being stuck, making mistakes and failure as learning opportunities;
making public their interest in and commitment to learning rather than performance;
Celebrating learning is about making learning the object of attention. Here the values of learning bubble up and show themselves in what you attend to, what you recognise, what you praise, what you display and celebrate. In learning friendly classrooms failure, mistakes, being stuck and applying effort have been re-framed so that learners come to view these old adversaries as valuable, interesting and essential. Furthermore the other major shift here is that the development and growth in learning behaviours themselves are given attention, praise and recognition. In the early stages re-defining the quest-like values of learning might simply include;
ensuring students (and parents) understand ‘being stuck’ as an interesting not shameful position, with tactics to get unstuck
ensuring students (and yourself and parents) understand what is meant by effort
ensuring students (and parents) understand the value of mistakes
celebrating students’ progress in learning behaviours
The success of this shift will depend on consistency and strong emphasis. You have to make these ideas/values obvious, big and overblown. Whispering them quietly won’t work. They have to be shouted about and put ‘in-your-face’ if they are to stick, be believed, be understood and capitalised on.
These ideas – growing learning behaviours, re-defining failure and displaying learning – are explored in the next 3 sections of this module.
2. How does celebrating learning impact on students?
Teachers as habit formers.
You are an influential habit former and, as such, will need to be mindful of how you help students to form, replace, re-form and strengthen their learning habits.
Ask yourself whether your teaching habits are helping students’ learning habits? What might you need to adapt and change?
Habits form through use and practice (deliberate or otherwise!). But desirable habits will survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them.
Take a look at this aspect of practice in more detail and, in particular, note the expected growth in student behaviours.
How developing the way that you celebrate learning has an impact on students’ growth as learners.
Developing a deep understanding of Celebrating Learning – how teacher behaviours may grow over time, and how learner behaviours may respond.
Here we take a deep look at how these teaching behaviours change over time and the impact they have on learning behaviours as the classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly.
In the green boxes on the left-hand side we map the incremental shifts in teaching behaviours (you have already met these in section 1), and in the blue boxes on the right-hand side the anticipated outcomes for learners. Remember that progression in learning behaviours is likely to lag behind progression in teaching behaviours as it takes time for learners to discern and respond to the cultural changes that teachers are making.
Also, even if it is possible to make a step-change in classroom culture and jump directly towards the top of the green columns, do not be tempted to do so – your learners will not yet have the necessary skills and attitudes to keep pace. Aim to make slow and steady progress, one cell / row at a time.
Progression in how learning is celebrated:
There are three aspects of Celebrating Learning classroom culture:
Growing learning habits;
Re-defining failure;
Learning on display.
And two key learner outcomes:
Growing self-awareness;
Growing a growth mindset.
All 5 have their own development trajectories, the detailed steps as classrooms become increasingly learning-friendly. Below is the progression chart for how these 5 inter-related aspects might grow over time as teacher behaviours and learning behaviours develop.
Ask yourself:
Which of the green cells best describe my current teaching behaviours?
Which of the blue cells best describe my students’ learning behaviours?
Is there any connection between your teaching behaviours and their learning behaviours?
Thinking about moving on:
If your students are mostly in Blue row 1, try adopting teaching behaviours in Green row 2. Similarly, Blue 2 means trying Green 3 etc.
3. Practical ways to grow your practice in growing learning habits
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are interested in and able to describe how they are growing as an effective learner. They create targets for their own learning development and plan how they intend to meet these targets.
The whole point of everything described in the previous sections is to enable young people to become better learners, to grow a supple learning mind, to become a lifelong learner. So the growth of learning behaviours is attended to closely. Successful growth or progression means that not only can students make use of reflection, or imagination, or managing their distractions, but that over time they spontaneously make more and better use of these learning skills and tools and secure them as habits. It is this type of growth, improvement that is acknowledged, recognised, celebrated or praised in some way.
Learning powered classrooms look out for and celebrate three dimensions of progress:
the frequency and strength of the habit – how often it is used spontaneously as the need arises;
the scope of its use – the range of contexts within which the skill is used (from the familiar to new uncharted territory);
the skilfulness of the habit – how the skill becomes more subtle, more appropriate to circumstances, more sophisticated.
In other words, students ask more and more questions not only in one subject but across all subjects and moreover they ask increasingly better, more searching, more generative questions. They take a questioning stance to learning.
Learning behaviours take time to recognise and grow, and it’s important to develop maps or progression ‘trajectories’ that surface the steps between, for example, the natural curiosity of a three year-old and the sophisticated skill-set of the consummate questioner. The trajectories allow teachers to identify, nudge and design activity to help students build progressively the fine grain learning behaviours of the effective learner.
What is being celebrated here is how young people are getting better at how, when and where they are using their learning behaviours. It’s the Building bit of Building Learning Power. There would be little point in introducing such learning behaviours if we didn’t attend to having them grow.
1. Introduce careful watching of students’ use of learning behaviours.
I emphasise that students can improve and strengthen their learning behaviours. I am realising how students benefit from or are limited by their use of their learning behaviours.
a) Celebrate growth in learning behaviours…however obvious or ‘everyday’
In this display, group working behaviours are being noticed and celebrated.
Even everyday behaviours such as listening to a partner are being recognised and publicly celebrated by a framed and displayed photograph.
It is in ways such as this that you show the value of positive learning behaviours and keep alerting students to what effective learners do.
b) Watch your learners carefully
Learning observation tools.
Use this or a similar observation tool to reflect on how your students are learning in terms of their Perseverance, Collaboration, Questioning and Revising. Colour in each ‘segment’ of the wheel depending on the extent to which learners are using the skill – use the concentric circles to convey frequency / effectiveness. You will soon get a picture of how your students are as learners.
If you feel your students are capable, engage them in monitoring their own learning behaviours using the same wheel, but this time written as ‘Did I . . ‘ rather than ‘Did they . . . ‘.
For the segments that you are struggling to colour in because your learners don’t currently do this, ask yourself whether you are providing sufficient opportunities for them to practise this behaviour?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of Rating Wheels is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
2. Expand supporting learning growth
I enable, encourage and monitor students’ use of, and improvement in, key learning behaviours (resilience, collaboration, questioning, revising)
a) Enable learners to monitor their own progress in the key learning behaviours
Use either of these self-evaluation tools to encourage students to think about how they are exercising various aspects of the 4 key learning behaviours – Persevering, Collaborating, Questioning and Revising. The first tool would be more useful for gaining a baseline evaluation of students and for tracking changes during the early stages of development, whereas the second tool is targeted at students with more extensive exposure to the concepts. Simply choose the one that you feel best fits your students.
Use the outcomes to:
initiate learning conversations with students;
track changes in perceptions over time by using it more than once;
b) Learning stickers and awards to recognise learning
Many schools have set up pupil awards for learning well and/or for being good at spotting when they are using different learning muscles. They use stickers, certificates, a mention in assembly, or tea with the headteacher. Self-awareness and understanding of the detail of the learning process is further developed by asking pupils to articulate what they have done to earn the award.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Similar ideas are introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple, and developed in ii) and iii).
Look there for more ideas.
3. Deepen supporting learning growth
My language of learning is enriched/broadened by the school’s progression maps. This helps students deepen their understanding of how to use learning behaviours more profitably.
Give each student a coloured piece of A4 paper on the classroom wall. Attach an envelope to the paper containing a piece of card cut up into five pieces. Each piece of card has a student generated ‘learning how’ goal. For example:
I can take turns in a group.
I can ignore things that distract me.
I can keep calm when I get stuck.
I found a way of getting unstuck.
I learned to how to improve something after making a mistake.
I built on other people’s ideas.
When a student achieves a stated behaviour the card is taken out of the envelope and stuck to their piece of paper. The aim is to have all five pieces of card making up a completed jigsaw on the wall in a given time. e.g. a fortnight.
This is an example of public recognition being given to learning behaviour goals.
b) Celebrate growth in the skill
Schools have found intriguing ways of celebrating and depicting the growth in learning habits. The display shown here is about the growth of questioning skills. Each aspect of the learning behaviour is explained on a leaf and students put a small picture of themselves onto the leaf when they feel they are using this skill effectively. In this way students become aware and conscious of their development and their next step.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Go to any of the modules, section 1.
Use the progression grids to help you to structure what goes on your displays.
4. Widen access to learning growth.
Together with students I set and agree intentions for developing their learning behaviours with reference to the school’s maps of progression. Greater recognition is given to improving learning habits than to performance.
a) Have students work out a hierarchy for their learning goals . . . .
10 statements relating to asking questions drawn from the progression map for questioning. Offer them to students in no particular order.
Ask students to categorise them into 3 groups for a classroom display
basic questioning skills
developing questioning skills
higher level questioning skills
I ask closed questions to gather factual information.
I can tell the difference between open and closed questions.
I ask questions when I want to find something out.
I am good at finding information on the internet.
I ask open questions to encourage others to tell me what they think.
I think about how I am asking questions to make sure I don’t upset anyone.
I am not afraid of asking questions in class.
I ask ‘what if . . . ‘ type questions to explore possibilities
I ask myself if the answer is true and if it tells me what I need to know.
I can use a book index to help me find information.
Use these categorised lists to:
display in your classroom
to ‘set and agree intentions for developing students’ learning behaviours’?
change each of these statements into an If / Then target?
create something similar for a different learning behaviour – say for Collaboration? Or for Reasoning?
For more on If /Then targets:
Look in Section 2, Relating for Learning –
Or in this section, 5, Celebrating Learning –
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Progression in Questioning is explored in the Questioning module, section 1.
Progression in all other learning behaviours are likewise explored in section 1 of their respective modules.
5. Enrich the growth of learning behaviours.
I encourage and enable students to identify and pursue their own learning behaviour development targets. Students understand how they need to improve and how they are going to do it.
Advice about ‘making more effort’ or ‘asking more questions in class’ are almost never effective because they are ill-defined and beg more questions than answers – how much more effort? what kind of effort? / how many more questions? what type of questions?
If we want students to grow their learning behaviours we need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. Motivation research proposes an effective solution to this called ‘if-then’ planning.
‘Ifs’ are the situations you want to remind yourself about. It is the bit that reminds you about the target.
‘Thens’ are what you will do about something, the action you will take.
a) Create if/then targets for, in this case, collaboration:
For the emerging collaborator, choose from:
If a friend does not allow me to have my turn → Then I will remind them that is fair that we all have a go.
If I am working with a partner → Then I will make sure that I say what I think.
If we are working together → Then I will do what the team needs me to do.
If we don’t seem to know what to do → Then I will suggest that we need to work out what the task is really about.
If I have been in a team → Then I will think about how well I contributed.
For the developing collaborator, choose from:
If I’m losing patience with what someone is saying → Then I will take a deep breath and keep quiet.
If a group member is not saying anything → Then I will ask them what they want to say.
If I’m working as a team → Then I will ask to take on a different role from last time.
If we are deciding what to do → Then I will make certain that what we are suggesting is realistic.
If others suggest how I might have contributed more effectively → Then I will listen patiently and think carefully about what they have said.
For the good collaborator, choose from:
If a team member makes a really good comment → Then I will make sure that I congratulate them for it.
If I hear a good idea → Then I will try to help to improve the idea further.
If our team is working together → Then I will suggest how I can be of most help to the group.
If we are making plans → Then I will remind others that we need to decide on the order we intend to do things.
If we have finished → Then I will remind myself and others to think about how well we worked together.
And for the already sophisticated collaborator, choose from:
If someone is getting angry → Then I will remind them that we have ways of managing conflict.
If someone is having trouble saying what they think → Then I will try to help them, even if I do not fully agree with them.
If our team is deciding roles → Then I will ask to undertake a role that I wish to get better at.
If we are working together → Then I will suggest that we check to see how things are going.
If we have finished → Then I will ask how the way we worked helped us to achieve our goals.
If a job needs doing → Then I will volunteer to do it myself if no one else offers.
If I think we can do it even better → Then I will try to convince others that we should make some changes.
If I am in a new team → Then I will do my best to support the team in any way that I can.
If we have nearly finished → Then I will remind the team to check that we have achieved what we set out to do.
If we have finished → Then I will ask how we could do it even better next time.
Could you, with your colleagues, develop a similar set of levelled if /then targets for the other behaviours that you are developing?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Go to any of the modules, section 1.
Use the progression grids to help you to structure your if/then statements.
4. Practical ways to grow your practice in re-defining failure
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they exhibit confident uncertainty. They expect to make mistakes from which they learn. They understand that this applies equally to acquiring content and to their growth as a learner.
Re-defining classroom learning; new ways to view learning
“The hallmark of successful individuals is that they love learning, they seek challenges, they value effort, and they persist in the face of obstacles.” (Carol Dweck, 2000)
Mistakes or errors
‘Errors represent invaluable aids with the potential to help us learn. When we see failure in a new light, success becomes a new and exhilarating concept’. Black Box Thinking: The Surprising Truth About Success. Matthew Syed
Making mistakes, and more importantly covering them up – or rubbing them out – is now viewed as wasteful. Mistakes are a natural part of learning and recognised as valuable; something to learn from, something to improve on, something to change and try new ways, taking a risk and then learning from it if it doesn’t work. Mistakes are having a makeover not just in classrooms but in wide range of progressive institutions.
Redefining failure is and will be an essential part of reversing pupils’ fixed mindsets.
Stuck
Similarly, ‘stuck’ is promoted as an interesting place to be rather than a place of shame. Getting stuck, coming against a brick wall, not knowing what to do next is a natural part of learning. If you don’t get stuck the learning is probably not challenging enough. Being stuck is where real learning begins. Pupils who never experience being stuck or struggle with learning can become fragile learners unable to cope emotionally with the inevitable difficulty of learning and life.
Viewing learning as interesting, challenging, stimulating and worthy of effort needs to feed into changing pupils’ fixed mindsets.
Effort
Effort is a word we use often without really thinking about what it means. What do children understand by ‘effort’ or ‘try harder’? Using learning power language helps teachers to be much more specific about what sort of effort they suggest pupils make. As one teacher put it;
‘I often used to just tell students to make more effort, and got blank stares back. But when I started using Building Learning Power language I realised I could be much more specific about “making more effort.” I could turn my prompts and nudges into really useful statements. So now I watch students carefully through the Building Learning Power lens and say things like “how could you use your imagination to…?”, Or, “what questions might be helpful to take you further with this?”. I’ve started defining the sort of effort I want them to make’
Praise
The negative value of too much general ability praise, uncovered by Carole Dweck in her research into Growth Mindsets, has caused teachers to think differently about giving praise. Suggested shifts in giving praise include:
Praise the effort, not the ‘ability’;
Praise the process not the outcome;
Praise in specifics of learning behaviours, not generalities;
Praise privately;
Praise authentically, and not too much;
Praise should be seen as separate from feedback; ( praise is evaluation)
If using stickers, awards, treats etc (concrete tokens of recognition), make sure they’re given for accomplishing specific process or product goals.
1. Introduce ways to be confident about being stuck.
I give students opportunities to experience failure as an essential part of learning. I emphasise and promote being stuck as an interesting place to be. I give students easy access to learning resources.
a) Differentiate between learning time (zone) and performance time (zone)
This cultural shift is THE essential aspect of friendly classroom cultures. We can do no better than suggest you watch this video by way of explanation.
Set aside some quality time to watch an 11 minute TED Talk by Eduardo Briceno called ‘How to get better at the things you care about’. Prepare to spend time in your own learning zone, and temporarily abandon your performance zone. Consider particularly how you might “create low stakes islands in otherwise high stakes seas” in your own classroom. Ask yourself if your students might benefit from watching this? What would you hope that they might learn? How might it help them to attempt and to relish greater challenge?
b) Give mistakes high status, a key role in learning
Say that you expect students to make, for example, 3 in a lesson. If they haven’t made the quota of mistakes they are to ask for harder work
Make a ‘Mistakes of the Week’ display.
identify Good mistakes – as misconceptions and discuss them
Offer a range of examples of good mistakes as lesson starters for students to find and discuss.
Model making mistakes and how you learn from them.
c) Recognise the big link between emotional engagement and challenge
Learning is always an emotional business and learning how to manage this is best done ‘on the job’ in the course of learning rather than as a separate stand-alone activity. Emotional engagement is a prerequisite of powerful learning, it’s what gets you interested enough to be willing to put in the effort to get better and see the value of pushing yourself. So lessons aren’t just designed to make use of different kinds of learning behaviours but to give those behaviours a good work-out. Activities are designed to:
be challenging, where being stuck and confused are regular and fruitful experiences.
give students the opportunity to ‘learn what to do when they don’t know what to do’ – to work on wild tasks, rather than tame ones, where there’s plenty of scope to get lost and perplexed.
Or, as a teacher said to us recently:
“I became a better teacher the day I stopped thinking ‘have I made it easy enough for them to understand it?’ and started thinking ‘have I made it hard enough to stretch them?'”
Try these ideas to support challenge
Make positive connections between making mistakes and challenge
Model how to think about and work through challenges
Create a challenge wall; put up questions, extension tasks, riddles, problems. A go-to place for another challenge when other learning is finished
Display work that shows students have improved mistakes etc.
Stimulate using ‘Stingray’ questions…What if...(something they thought they knew from a different angle – What if gravity was twice as strong ?)
Use the ‘learning pit’ to talk through what to do to overcome/surmount a challenge.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The Ted Talk is explored in depth in the Listening module, section 3.
The idea of the Learning Pit is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand re-defining failure.
I encourage students to work out why they are stuck, encouraging them to engage in the process of finding a way through. Classroom language has been modified to emphasise effort over achievement, improving ability over correcting mistakes etc.
When a student says ‘I’m stuck’, resist the temptation to ask ‘what are you stuck on?’ – you know only too well they will probably reply ‘everything’. Better to explore ‘why’ they are stuck . . . .
Encourage students to identify the cause of their stuckness. Move students from saying “I’m stuck” to ” I’m stuck because…” Naming the problem will often suggest a reasonable next step.
It’s also useful to insist that students can’t call themselves ‘stuck’ unless they have tried to apply at least 1 solution.
and/or
b) Stuck of the Week
Regularly encourage students to think about a moment when they were stuck and how they got around it. Celebrate the unusual ones by displaying them on a ‘stuck wall’. Students should develop an interest in their ability to overcome stuckness.
By celebrating the moment of being stuck, students are reminded that stuck is not a place of shame, rather that it is part of the journey. It is equally important to celebrate the unsticking strategy so that students can see that there is always a way forward.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of ‘Stuck because’ is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen re-defining failure
I regard mistakes as valuable learning opportunities. My feedback concentrates on what was right and why, more than what was incorrect. Students reflect on developing strategies for spotting mistakes in the future.
Offer students examples of written work with different numbers of mistakes in them. Challenge students to work in pairs to correctly identify the mistakes in each example. When complete tell pairs if they have found the right number of mistakes but if not don’t discuss which, if any, they have overlooked.
b) Display and celebrate mistakes
Give mistakes high status, a key role in learning:
Say that you expect pupils to make, for example, 3 in a lesson. If they haven’t made the quota of mistakes they are to ask for harder work.
Make a ‘Mistakes of the Week’ display.
Identify ‘Good’ mistakes – as misconceptions and discuss them.
Offer a range of examples of good mistakes as lesson starters for pupils to find and discuss.
Model making mistakes and how you learn from them.
c) Create a challenge wall
Make the Challenge wall the focal point for your challenge culture. Make sure you add and refer to it frequently. For example:
Invite students to post up the most challenging questions they can think of. Allocate time to discuss them. The wall becomes a challenging talking point.
Cover the wall with challenges. questions, extension tasks, riddles, puzzles etc. These could be used by students who have finished their tasks early. Alternatively, set aside lesson time to for the whole class to discuss a challenge they select.
Display students’ work which shows mistakes they have learned from. This would include problems which students have persisted with or work that has been revised and edited to improve it.
What we notice and what we talk about matters. Students are ever-alert to the underlying culture of the classroom – ‘does this teacher really want me to make mistakes, or is she more interested in me getting it right?’
What’s more, you can say you want them to make mistakes as often as you like, but if your reward systems are tilted towards ‘correct’ answers, they will readily sense the inconsistency.
How do you / will you show your sustained commitment to students making mistakes and learning from them?
d) Sharing mistakes
Make mistakes useful. Create a ‘Beware board’ in the classroom and invite pupils to share their mistakes on Post-its. Talk about why the mistake was made, what thinking led to the confusion and how it could be avoided in the future. Bringing mistakes into the open and discussing them helps other students to avoid them while recognising their value.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
See more in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4. Widen access to success
I focus my learning talk around the particular learning strategies, attitudes or behaviours that seem to lie behind a student’s progress. I share this approach with parents as well as students.
a) Identifying and celebrating high level learning skills in an ever wider range of behaviours and linking these skills to curriculum progress
The intention here is to celebrate how high level thinking skills are linked to and result in curriculum progress.
The ideas presented here link across all aspects of this module. They:
encourage teachers to widen their attention beyond the key 4 behaviours to include the cognitive aspects of Reasoning, Imagining and Making Links (see Relating for Learning);
are framed in the form of ‘nudging learning’ through feedback and expand the classroom’s learning language (see Talking for Learning);
make explicit links between what has been learned and how it has been learned (see Constructing Learning);
focus on the school’s progression maps to identify and celebrate higher-level learning behaviours (see Celebrating Learning);
contribute to making learning visible (which is a facet of all 4).
Higher level Reasoning skills include:
creating sound arguments back by evidence;
balancing differing possibilities;
using ‘if . . . then . . . ‘ type reasoning;
detecting flaws in logic.
Higher level Imagining skills include:
visualising the future to enhance performance;
breaking the ‘rules’ to achieve novel outcomes;
being willing and prepared to follow one’s intuition;
disregarding conventional wisdom.
Higher level Link Making skills include:
keeping an open mind;
seeing connections between different disciplines;
using analogies make links between new and older learning;
applying ‘school learning’ to real world problems.
Go to the progression charts that are in section 1 of the Reasoning / Imagining / Making Links Stepping Stones and Nutshells modules.
Ask yourself – how have the charts been used to generate these speech bubbles?
[For example, the comment about ‘Rehearsing in your mind’s eye . . ‘ (in Celebrating Imagining above) is derived from the Imagining chart, 4) Active Imagination column, Yellow (Organises) row.]
Can you match the other speech bubbles to other cells on these charts?
Suppose you were looking to create some celebratory comments relating to the Blue (Responds) rows – what would they be?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Go to section 1 of any modules and use the progression charts for ideas on higher level learning skills.
5. Enrich the development of success.
I ensure students feel they are valued contributors, able to learn from mistakes and feel valued confident contributors to learning. Everyone is alert to, and counter, all manner of unhelpful attitudes to learning.
How are you most likely to describe your usual classroom?
My classroom?
Our classroom?
Their classroom?
And does it make any difference?
In his book, ‘Creating Cultures of Thinking’, Ron Ritchhart argues that the pronouns we use, like my/your/our and 1/you/we/us, betray our deep-seated views and belief systems. Most of us are completely oblivious to how we talk in terms of the pronouns we use, but our choices, he argues, convey a powerful if hidden message to students.
Consider for a moment the teacher who asks:
What are you noticing?
[This may be a question of an individual (the singular ‘you’) or of more than one person (the plural ‘you’). Some students even interpret it as a question for other people, but not for them.]
Contrast that with essentially the same question:
What are we noticing?
[This time it is definitely plural, and includes the teacher. It is a clear invitation to shared endeavour.]
Likewise the phrases ‘your success criteria’ or ‘the success criteria’ are very similar to, but subtly different from, ‘our success criteria’
Will marginal shifts in language like this make a significant difference on their own? Almost certainly not, Ritchhart argues. But if we are serious about beginning to share responsibility with students we need to make sure that our language reflects that commitment rather than, unintentionally, undermining it.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of a community of learners is explored in the Collaboration module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5. Practical ways to grow your practice in putting learning on display
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are confident, independent, resilient learners as a result of experiencing a learning culture that intentionally stimulates, recognises and rewards such behaviours.
In a learning powered classroom learning will be on display in what you will see, hear and feel. In other words learning is visible in all sorts of ways.
You might find several ways of acknowledging learning on the walls:
useful prompts for use when stuck;
a list of agreed ground rules for the social habits the class have created and are focusing on;
displays of pupils efforts showing drafts and examples of work in progress to emphasise the idea of learning as a process;
a humorous display of mistakes of the week;
a display showing a partly completed class plan for their next school assembly;
a five point scale pupils have devised about levels of distraction;
some If -Then statements to encourage habit formation;
whiteboard display of icons showing the learning behaviours they are focusing just now;
photographs taken by some of the students which capture their peers displaying some learning behaviours;
statements showing what superpower learners say;
a ladder or learning line showing descriptions of how students might feel about the activities and their learning stretch just completed (low, good, high, overstretched) around which the students gather at the end of a session to reflect on their efforts.
At the side of the room there may be a review table with a label “Put your learning here if you want to come back to it, improve it or review it with the class”. There may be a pile of ‘learning journals’ which children use to illustrate and record the difficulties they are having, or indeed the triumphs.
You will see students moving freely around the classroom selecting resources they think they may need for their tasks. On a flip chart is today’s selection of tasks at different levels of challenge, but all challenging, for pupils to choose from. Some children are working on their own, some with their teacher, some in teams. They are focused, engaged, enthusiastic and excited about what they are doing. There’s no hint of anxiety or pressure or boredom. They are learning to handle uncertainty, learn together and embrace challenge. No one has told them ‘this is hard’, they are knowingly using their imagination, generative questioning, different sorts of resources, listening for the key points and so forth.
The language is enquiring, propelling the learning forward…what if, how come, now what.; every so often a group will stop and check if they are on track and if they need to try another way to tackle their task; at the end of the session one group reflects on their learning process and its outcomes with their teacher, other groups do this for themselves.
The classroom is humming with the language and imagery of learning. The natural process of learning has been unearthed and given high status. Attention to the environment can be a powerful culture builder. An environment that provokes curiosity and stimulates learning becomes a ‘teacher’ in itself.
1. Introduce wall displays to support the ‘how’ of learning
I display hints and tips about learning throughout the classroom; Stuck prompts, Curiosity corner, ‘Smart’ mistakes, Rights and Responsibilities of learners, photos of students using learning behaviours etc.
Work with students to find useful questions for them to ask themselves and helpful strategies which they might take when they are stuck. Ensure that there are plenty of options that come higher on the list than “Ask the teacher”. Create displays as reminders.
Here is an example generated by a year 7 class:
So called Stuck posters or prompts come in various shapes and sizes, but essentially they are simply home-made lists of what students can try when they get stuck with their learning.
To begin with, the teacher trains the students to make use of this information by greeting every request for prompting with; ‘Have you looked at the poster?’ After a while, looking at the poster becomes routine, and eventually, when the habit of self-unsticking becomes second nature, even the poster becomes redundant. It does not take long, in such a classroom, before ‘Ask the teacher’ becomes a last-ditch strategy, to be engaged only when all else has failed.
b) Curiosity corner
Create a Curiosity Corner with magnifying glasses and interesting objects …. shells, coins, dead insects, flowers …… and lots more! Spend a few minutes each day for children to report what new things they have noticed and the questions they have asked themselves about the objects.
c) Display the use of learning behaviours…..in this case Noticing
“We used our Noticing skills to find the different fruits and vegetables Archimboldo used in his portrait”
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of the Stuck Poster is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand displays of learning
I display the ‘learning to learn’ values of the classroom through Questioning walls, If-Then statements, Learning stretch ladders, drafts of work in progress etc.
a) Questions on display. Make the classroom question friendly.
Create question walls in the classroom to illustrate and prompt questioning. Display, for example:
Pupil-posted questions about current topics that need resolution.
‘The Question of The Day’.
Different types and purposes of questions.
Questioning routines that the class have defined.
A lexicon of questions for use when exploring and enquiring.
A list of questions for use to get started, or unstuck.
Annotated pupil work and pictures to provoke questioning.
b) Question walls…exploring question types
At the start of a topic call for and display questions which pupils think might be answered during a topic. Go on to;
Discuss what sort of questions these are — open, closed, speculative, divergent, clarifying, essential, subsidiary.
how they might lead to different types of information/reactions/strategies to gather information.
Draw up and display lists of generic questions to use whenever pupils undertake certain types of task, e.g. scientific investigation.
Refer to and extend these question groups regularly.
c) Create displays to highlight changes and revisions.
Collect and display work at different stages of development.
Use arrows and notes to highlight the changes and their impact. Renew and refer to these frequently to encourage students to review and amend their work.
Show that you do not expect perfection at the first attempt!
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of displays of work in progress is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
The idea of Question Walls are explored in the Questioning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple and also in ii).
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen displays of learning.
I create displays and achievement routines that help students to understand their progression in key learning behaviours.
Hallbankgate Village School have developed ladders for learning behaviours they are focusing on – the ones illustrated relate to aspects of Collaboration and Perseverance.
Beside the ladders, students are writing about themselves and where they are now. They are:
self-assessing;
explaining which of the skills they believe they use a lot;
offering evidence for when and how they did it.
This shows progression in learning and reflection on the process… in action!
b) Make learning lines public
Rather than displaying progression lines in classrooms, Landau Forte College in Derby display theirs in public circulation areas – strategically placed. Reasoning is near Maths and Science, Collaboration near P/E and Drama, Noticing near Art & Design etc.
Such lines are an alternative way of bringing the growth of learning behaviours to students’ attention? Also, they are an important message about what the school believes to be important.
Take a look around the public circulation areas in your own school – what do they reveal, intentionally or otherwise, about the school’s priorities?
c) Build and display your own learning trajectories – perhaps your students could help?
Get beyond the headline words like ‘Questioning’, and challenge yourself to create progression ladders that go from, for example, ‘Afraid of asking questions, unable to frame questions that get the required information’ to ‘Asks incisive questions with sensitivity to fuel insatiable curiosity’. What are the stepping stones that lie in between, and in broadly what order will they be acquired?
On the right is the perseverance ladder you saw in the Talking for Learning, Creating a language section. All of the learning behaviours will, eventually, need to be unpacked in a similar manner. It is only when you have done this that you (and your students) will fully understand learning and how it grows.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of progression in learning behaviours is explored in all modules, section 1.
4. Widen access to displaying learning
Together with my students, I create displays that illustrate how learning behaviours and content learning are inter-related.
Every classroom in Cadland Primary school has two walls dedicated to current curriculum plans, one for maths and one for literacy. The purpose of these displays is to show the journey of the current a unit of work. They show;
what the objectives are;
what the success criteria look like;
what the stages of the process consist of;
what is being learned at each stage;
prompts about the new things being learned;
what the end result might look like.
These visual journeys are talked about and added to as the class progresses through the unit content. Learning behaviours are added to each point in the plan. Now students are not only aware of what they are learning about but the learning behaviours they are using to help them get to grips with the content.
The broad brush descriptions of the learning behaviours being used is a powerful, visual coupling of content and process; the what with the how of learning.
The first photograph shows the learning behaviours they are using as they move through the unit. The second photograph shows a reflection on the learning behaviours used and what this accomplished.
Click to enlarge
Click to enlarge
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of creating displays that link content and learning behaviours is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
5. Enrich the living of learning values.
I ensure ‘learning to learn’ values are alive on classroom walls, how feedback is offered, how written work is commented on, how students are grouped, how self-esteem is built and how learning is viewed from the learner’s perspective.
A learning-friendly culture is for living, not for laminating.
Do displays support your desire to build a learning-friendly culture? Beware displays that are jaded, too high on walls, rarely referred to, laminated to lengthen their life, bought in from Twinkle and don’t reflect the underlying culture. Here’s a typical example of a potentially ‘lazy’ display where the sentiments behind the words may not be understood and the classroom organisation may not allow the implications to happen.
BBBBB is a well-known alternative to the more detailed, home grown stuck poster. If BBBBB is to be anything more than a nod to learning power the implicit issues need to be explored and made possible in the classroom. It invites students to:
use their Brain…what does this mean to the students in practice?
check in “the Book”… are students allowed to move around to find these resources, and are they readily available?
look on the (White/Smart)Board…do you always put useful stuff here?
ask their partner/another student (“Buddy”)…is this allowed and how likely is it to be useful?
ask the ‘Boss’ (teacher) for help…how available are you throughout a lesson?
Make sure displays mirror culture. Display does not, by itself, change the learning (and teaching) habits in the classroom. A learning-friendly culture is for living, not for laminating.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of BBBBB and C3B4Me are explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
6. Exploring your journey
Take another look at the Celebrating chart. Now that you’ve got a better idea of what it is trying to show, have a go at:
checking, for understanding, the cells you were unsure about previously
making a better, more considered, estimate of where your practice lies now.
Remember… don’t expect your practice to be at the same level across all three green columns. The interest lies in perhaps discovering skills you haven’t noticed yourself using before, and revealing those skills you may need to grow.
‘My role, as teacher, is to evaluate the effect I have on my students.’ It is to ‘know thy impact’, it is to understand this impact, and it is to act on this knowing and understanding.
(P19-20, ‘Visible Learning for Teachers’ by John Hattie)
This section invites you to consider:
the impact that your changes have had on your teaching and on your classroom culture;
the impact that your changes have had on your learners;
what you might do next.
The story so far . . .
In section 1.4 you made a rough estimate of where your classroom culture was on the Celebrating Learning chart.
In section 2.2 of this module you were invited to explore how the Celebrating Learning classroom culture impacts on students’ learning behaviours.
As a result . . .
you have implemented some changes in relation to Celebrating Learning.
Ask yourself:
What did I plan to do differently, and what impact was I hoping for?
What have you learned from this experiment about a) your teaching and b) your students, that you can take forward?
Asking why it did not work.
If the planned changes did not have the desired impact, why not?
What might have contributed to this?
With hindsight, what might you have done differently?
What will you do differently next time?
What have you learned from trying this idea out that you will take forward?
Asking ‘where next’?
Firstly, make sure that the successful changes that you have already made remain part of your teaching repertoire going forward. Just as it takes time to change students’ learning behaviours, it takes time and practice to translate teaching experiments into teaching habits.
Secondly, look back at section 1.4 again. Does that suggest anything you might wish to work on next?
Thirdly look at your students through the lens of the progression charts for learners (they are all in the download to the right). Which aspect of their learning development is most in need of attention? Does that help to focus what you might try next?
Fourthly – do not forget that you can keep revisiting these 4 modules (numbers 2/3/4/5) and trying out ever more learning-friendly approaches as you and your learners move forwards together.
This is the section I’m most worried about. Given the new stuff we wrote in Unit 3 in Playing v7 this section on constructing needs to pick up that very specific stuff on curriculum and lesson planning. No idea how yet.
Constructing learning: activities and classroom routines feed learning habits and learning becomes the object of learning. Learning challenging activities are designed to enable students to understand both the content and the process of learning. They do this by having a dual focus – to explore content and stretch students’ use of their learning behaviours. There is a strong underpinning of not just ‘doing’ learning but reviewing and reflecting on the process in order to make meaning and apply it elsewhere (transfer).
‘The biggest effects on learning occur when teachers become learners of their own teaching, and students become their own teachers’ (Hattie).
“The presence of challenging learning intentions has multiple consequences. Students can be induced to invest greater effort, and invest more of their total capacity than under low demand conditions.”
(John Hattie, Visible Learning)
Finding your way through this section
In Section 4 we unpack Constructing learning: designing activities to feed learning habits
Back in Section 1 you estimated where your practice was. Here you look not only at your practice but at the impact of that practice on students (see Section 4.2)
Recalculate where your practice lies for;
reflective models of learning (section 4.3)
linking learning and content (section 4.4)
offering rich and challenging activities (section 4.5)
Scan through these sections, without detouring into toggle boxes, and look for the stage where you think your practice lies;
1 introduce (Foundational Four behaviours)
2 expand (the range of behaviours being used)
3 deepen (use of all the behaviours)
4 widen (how the behaviours are used)
5 enrich
Take a detailed look at practical ideas for your current stage of practice and the one above.
Use the ideas, and those signalled in other BLP online modules, to further grow your classroom practice.
As learners become increasingly aware of how they are learning and, through reflection, how well they have been learning, they become better able to take control of their own learning behaviours and harness them to rise to challenge and achieve success.
1. Three ways of constructing learning
In this section we reach down into the mechanics of teaching and learning to find things that matter. Constructing Learning includes making learning visible by linking content with learning behaviours to enable students to become conscious of their learning by:
sharing and discussing in advance the learning behaviours necessary for success;
designing tasks that intentionally promote content acquisition and stretch learning behaviours;
Constructing learning firstly involves integrating reflection and review into the way learning is organised; where activities are designed to stretch and challenge not just in outcome terms but in the very nature of ‘doing’ the task (dual focus of content and process). Pupils’ emotional engagement is a prerequisite when learning is organised in these ways, and the value of learning is in pushing yourself so that your capacities are stretched and strengthened. The early stages of making a shift in this aspect of the learning friendly classroom might simply include;
plan lessons to explicitly include reflection and review purposefully
making challenge fun and available in forms other than activities
introducing a couple of Visible Thinking Routines
beginning to dabble with split screen learning
The classroom becomes a place where young people learn that to struggle with a problem is ultimately satisfying and brings its own rewards.
These ideas – reflection, linking learning and content, and rich, challenging activities – are explored in the next 3 sections below.
2. How does constructing learning impact on students?
Teachers as habit formers.
You are an influential habit former and, as such, will need to be mindful of how you help students to form, replace, re-form and strengthen their learning habits.
Ask yourself whether your teaching habits are helping students’ learning habits? What might you need to adapt and change?
Habits form through use and practice (deliberate or otherwise!). But desirable habits will survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them.
Take a look at this aspect of practice in more detail and, in particular, note the expected growth in student behaviours.
How developing the way that you construct learning has an impact on students’ growth as learners.
Developing a deep understanding of Constructing Learning – how teacher behaviours may grow over time, and how learner behaviours may respond.
Here we take a deep look at how these teaching behaviours change over time and the impact they have on learning behaviours as the classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly.
In the green boxes on the left-hand side we map the incremental shifts in teaching behaviours (you have already met these in section 1), and in the blue boxes on the right-hand side the anticipated outcomes for learners. Remember that progression in learning behaviours is likely to lag behind progression in teaching behaviours as it takes time for learners to discern and respond to the cultural changes that teachers are making.
Also, even if it is possible to make a step-change in classroom culture and jump directly towards the top of the green columns, do not be tempted to do so – your learners will not yet have the necessary skills and attitudes to keep pace. Aim to make slow and steady progress, one cell / row at a time.
Progression in how learning is constructed.
There are three aspects of Constructing Learning classroom culture:
Reflective models of learning;
Linking learning and content;
Offering rich, challenging activities.
And two key learner outcomes:
Growing reflection;
Growing an appetite for challenge.
All 5 have their own development trajectories, the detailed steps as classrooms become increasingly learning-friendly. Below is the progression chart for how these 5 inter-related aspects might grow over time as teacher behaviours and learning behaviours develop.
Ask yourself:
Which of the green cells best describe my current teaching behaviours?
Which of the blue cells best describe my students’ learning behaviours?
Is there any connection between your teaching behaviours and their learning behaviours?
Thinking about moving on:
If your students are mostly in Blue row 1, try adopting teaching behaviours in Green row 2. Similarly, Blue 2 means trying Green 3 etc.
3. Practical ways to grow your practice in building reflection
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are reflective about themselves as learners and how / where they might apply their learning behaviours in other areas of their life and/or future employment. They organise what they need to do and, through wise reflection, learn from experience, so creating long-term memories.
This familiar learning cycle highlights what is needed in order to learn from experience. By active learning we mean active engagement with materials, with ideas, with relationships and with other resources.
The teacher’s role is to facilitate the cycle using questions such as;
1 In the DO phase
What’s happening?
What do you notice?
How are you feeling about this?
What else is happening?
2 In the REVIEW phase
What struck you?
What did you see operating?
How was that significant?
What seemed effective?
3 In the LEARN/SO WHAT phase
How did you make sense of that?
What does that mean to you?
What might help explain that?
4 In the APPLY/ NOW WHAT phase
Where does this leave you?
Where does this take you?
Do you know other situations like this?
Meta cycle
It’s not sufficient to simply have an experience in order to learn. Without reflecting on the experience it may quickly be forgotten or its learning potential lost (Gibbs 1988). This is the model that best drives the learning in learner and learning focused classrooms.
1. Introduce teaching for active engagement and interactive learning.
I give learners ‘hands on’ opportunities to experience and participate in decision making, thinking, handling materials using the familiar ‘Plan Do Review’ learning process.
A reflective model of learning, like the Active Learning Cycle opposite, is a long-established feature of effective learning experiences. As Mike Hughes comments in Tweak to Transform, “Learning without reflection is like trying to fill a bath without putting the plug in”. And yet, reflection in lessons is frequently neglected for one of two reasons, and sometimes both:
Reflection time often comes after the learning has happened – towards the end of the lesson. Hence if the lesson overruns, the reflection time gets squeezed, or indeed is simply lost. Teachers who plan in lesson review points rather than the more traditional ‘plenary’ ensure that reflection is an integral part of their lessons, rather than a bolt-on at the end.
Even in lessons with review points, reflection is often done by teachers rather than by learners. Frequently teachers use review points to check understanding, and they do most of the talking and most of the questioning. Too often such intervals are reduced to time for teachers to say (again) what they intended to teach, rather than time for learners to reflect on and explain what they have learned. Reflection should be done by learners, not for learners.
At this stage, reflection will mostly be about what has been learned, the content. Learners may not, at this stage, have sufficient awareness of learning as a process to engage in reflection on the learning process itself.
For example…
a) Plan. Do. Review.
Plan What will it look like when it’s finished?’ (WWILLWIF)
Set a task — physical, dramatic, written, practical, spoken, visual — that has clear parameters.
Make WWILLWIF the regular precursor to any action.
Ask students to determine WWILLWIF for themselves and in conjunction with others.
Help them to visualise this in an appropriate form.
Build WWILLWIF into a list of stuck prompts, as a reminder to think ahead, but also to help students to get unstuck by visualising what the finished article might look like.
With older students, you might consider exploring one of Stephen Covey’s Habits of Highly Effective People – to ‘Begin with the end in Mind’.
Do Visible Thinking Routine. Headlines: a routine for capturing Essence.
This routine draws on the idea of newspaper-type headlines as a vehicle for summing up and capturing the essence of an event, idea, concept, topic, etc. The routine asks one core question:
If you were to write a headline for this topic or issue right now that captured the most important aspect that should be remembered, what would that headline be?
Consider following it up with the challenge of writing the first paragraph only of the newspaper article, the one that lays out all of the key information relating to the headline.
Could also be used as a lesson starter to frame students’ minds to be ready to adjust their point of view; to change their mind or ideas.
Teacher talk
Review Build in Lesson review points – so that students reflect for themselves
But lesson review points (or plenaries) are often teacher-led. Too often they are a recap of what the teacher wanted students to learn – little more than a restating of the learning intentions and a quick check of student understanding. Necessary, maybe, but not the opportunity for students to reflect for themselves on what they have learned and how they have learned it.
Try the simple method of students talking in pairs to distil:
three things they have learned today;
three things they still need to find out;
three things they hope to do next lesson.
Select one or two pairs to feed their opinions back to the rest of the class. Steer students to explain what they think they have learned rather than to hear what you think you have taught them.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Beginning with the end in mind is introduced in the Planning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
The Headlines routine is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
2. Expand active engagement by action reflection.
I inject into lessons a requirement for students to ‘watch out for’ how they learn, solve problems, get out of difficulties. i.e. monitor their learning process and reflect on how they are learning.
Building in reflection on the learning process itself.
The Meta-Learning Cycle, as illustrated opposite, contains the Active Learning Cycle to reflect on content, and enhances it to include reflection on the learning process itself. It helps learners to become aware of which learning behaviours they are employing / have employed.
At this stage they might be able to simply name the behaviours – they might, for example say they collaborated and persevered. Help them to expand their thinking to explain how they collaborated, or how they persevered.
As they develop understanding of the processes of learning, learners will become able to explain both how they collaborated, for example, and how effectively they collaborated. Conversation will move beyond ‘working together’ and ‘group work’ to include references to resolving disagreements, building consensus, building on the ideas of others, taking on roles etc.
For example
a) Build review points into lessons – so that students reflect for themselves
The simple method of students talking in pairs to distil the content:
three things they have learned today;
three things they still need to find out;
three things they hope to do next lesson.
is lifted to meta-cognitive reflection by the addition of:
three ways in which we learned today
one way of learning you want to improve on tomorrow
Select one or two pairs to feed their opinions back to the rest of the class.
Pick up what they think they have learned and how they learned it.
b) How might we tackle this?
A lack of confidence often stems from simply not knowing what to do or how to do it. The task appears overwhelming and otherwise confident individuals become paralysed by the prospect of the task ahead.
At the beginning of a session talk with students about the strategies and things they might use to help them with their learning. Steer talking about how they might tackle this, thinking about strategies that have worked in the past, or speculating on new approaches that might work. It is time spent thinking about tackling the task rather than actually starting to tackle it. It reminds students that they have a range of strategies available and gives confidence that they have the tools for the job in hand.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of students reflecting on how they are learning is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue, and iii) and iv).
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen active learning by reflecting on sense making.
I design a wider variety of active learning tasks so as to include the use of a broadening range of learning habits. Students are enabled to monitor how different task types help them make meaning.
This routine helps students make connections between new ideas and prior knowledge. It also encourages them to take stock of ongoing questions, puzzles and difficulties as they reflect on what they are learning.
Connect:
How are the ideas and information presented connected to what you already know?
Extend:
What new ideas did you get that extended or pushed your thinking in new directions?
Challenge:
What is still challenging you or confusing for you to get your mind round? What questions, wondering or puzzles do you now have?
The natural place to use this routine is after students have learned something new. For example: after exploring a work of art, a theory, a method, a piece of evidence. Try it as a reflection during a lesson, after a longer project, or when completing a unit of study. The routine works just as well with the whole class, small groups or individually.
b) Use a wider range of learning behaviours i.e. Reasoning (sequencing) and task designs to enhance making links
Cut up;
a cartoon,
series of pictures of a production process,
a flow diagram,
a mathematical proof,
a story line,
a musical score,
a poem,
a sequence of events, and so on.
Invite students to reassemble the pieces in what they think is a viable order and explain their reasons for this. Model and listen for the language of reasoning to strengthen the process.
[Lift the level of challenge by omitting one or two of the pieces, or by including a red herring or two, or by interleaving two sequences that need to be separated before the sequencing can be completed.]
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Connect, Extend, Challenge is introduced in the Making Links module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4. Widen access to action-reflection learning.
I extend the variety of task types to include active experimentation, inquiry and reflection. Teams and individuals engage in and reflect on open-ended experiments as a key way of gaining knowledge, including lengthy, inter-disciplinary enquiries.
reflection In action (or monitoring) undertaken in the hurly-burly of the process of learning,
reflection On action (or evaluating) a retrospective focusing on what happened, what worked and to how to do it better next time.
Being able to reflect on, refine and review your ideas is a key learning characteristic. Students need to be taught:
not to wait till they’ve finished before checking how they are getting on;
to keep making small checks and revisions all the time as they go along …am I on the right track? Is there something I’m missing? (Reflection In action)
to check what they have done at the end…is this as good as I can make it? (A bit of both depending on whether it needs further adjustments or not)
and at the end, to think about whether there’s a better way to do it? (Reflection On action)
b) Try enquiry-based learning
Developing curiosity, independence, and transferable research skills is at the heart of ‘enquiry-based learning’ (EBL) This intent can be explained as:
‘committed to creating a challenging environment where innovation and flexibility are celebrated. An approach to learning that focuses on student enquiry provides both teachers and students with an opportunity to think outside the normal confines of the curriculum. Teachers are encouraged to work collaboratively to break free from content-driven curriculum planning, and to focus on the skills that they would like their learners to develop.’
For example…Students in Years 7, 8 and 9 could experience several weeks each term when different curriculum areas come together to provide investigative work designed to generate a spirit of enquiry and experimentation. The humanities come together for an eight-week block to explore issues of migration under the driving question: Why don’t people stay at home? Science, PE and Mathematics have combined for a unit called A Question of Sport where students investigate the science and maths of certain sports. They experiment, for example, with the ways tennis would change if ball weight and racquet sizes changed. RE and Humanities come together to consider a wide range of disastrous events—a tsunami, the Holocaust, the crucifixion, and explore the question: Does every cloud have a silver lining? After two weeks of research, groups present their findings to their peers, parents and teachers.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of students reflecting in action and on action is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5. Enrich the use of action-reflection learning.
I engage individuals and teams in ever more learner driven active participation, exploration and research in order to develop understanding and create personal meaning through reflection.
a) Build ‘What I would do differently next time?’ into learners’ responses to feedback
Insist that when students respond to your feedback they indicate what they will do differently next time. Get students into the habit of acting on feedback rather than merely reading it. ‘What they will do differently next time’ is their self-generated target for development.
Teacher talk
b) Have students analysing their own performance
Self-analysis of performance and creation of feedback
In order to reach the goals of progressing in their learning – be it content or process – students must be able to self-regulate their own learning. Providing helpful feedback enables students to do this.
Share assessment criteria with students and ask them to assess/comment on the (imperfect) solutions you provide. Invite them to produce improvements based on their own feedback.
Share assessment criteria with students and require them to assess/comment on their own work, and amend it if necessary, before submitting it.
Ensure that your written comments are framed as questions to which your students are required to respond. “What do you think you need to do to make this section more convincing?” is preferable to “This section needs more explanation”, as it moves responsibility to the learner to identify what more needs to be done.
Teacher talk
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of ‘doing it differently next time’ is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4. Practical ways to grow your practice in linking content and learning
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are aware of how their growth as a learner is linked to and enhances their subject progress and attainment. They employ a range of highly effective learning behaviours and study effectively to achieve their own goals.
Whether we realise it or not, all lessons have a dual purpose:
The content dimension, with material to be mastered;
The ‘epistemic’ dimension, with some learning skills and habits being exercised.
In conventional lessons where the teacher remains the focus of attention and the initiator of all activity, and where the epistemic dimension is not acknowledged, students gain habits of compliance and dependence, rather than curiosity and self-reliance. In developing learning power, teachers are making conscious choices about which habits to introduce and stretch and how best to couple these with content so that lessons become more interesting and challenging. Through such overt coupling of content and specific types of process, students come to know, understand and take control of their learning behaviours – they knowingly use and develop the whole range of learning behaviours.
1. Introduce activities planned to stretch a learning disposition.
I plan activities using the learning behaviours being introduced. I ensure activities are designed to invite use of these behaviours. Lessons are developed from intriguing questions in order to build curiosity.
a) Set goals with learning in mind – shift the way you plan.
Think through lesson planning a bit differently:
the learning behaviours that could be useful for getting to grips with the content;
how the design of activities /tasks will best stimulate these behaviours;
how learners could be made more aware of these behaviours;
how learners could be enabled to reflect on and evaluate their use of these behaviours.
In planning terms, you have made a shift from thinking;
From ‘what do I have to teach and how am I going to teach it?’
To ‘what do students need to learn, how will they best learn it, and how am I going to orchestrate that learning?’
b) Dual-focused learning
Learning activities are designed to combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. Students come to know that the content they are studying is a way of giving their minds a useful workout.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Planning with learning in mind is explored in all modules, section 3.
2. Expand the learning behaviours used.
Activities in my lessons now invite the use of a wider range of learning behaviours. Objectives emphasise the ‘How’ before ‘What’ and blend in the basic behaviours: perseverance, questioning, collaboration and revising as necessary.
Setting a goal that the learner has little or no motivation to achieve is unlikely to lead to success. What is needed is learner buy-in to goals.
Evidence shows that goals that relate to doing something or researching something, or creating something . . . are better motivators than goals that relate to knowing something or passing / doing well in a test.
Putting the ‘how’ before the ‘what’.
So – a goal (or objective or outcome) relating to ‘understanding xxxxx’ or ‘knowing yyyyy’ is less likely to motivate a learner to make the effort than a goal that starts with some indication of the sort of ‘effort’ or way of doing something;
work with a partner to decide why…….
use your problem solving skills to work out……
use your imagination to …
using your xxx (closed/open/ sifting/) questioning skills, work out/identify…
Where ‘knowing goals’ place the emphasis on the successful acquisition of knowledge or creates a pass/fail scenario, the ‘doing goals’ focus on how – something to do rather than something to know.
More examples;
With a partner, use your reasoning skills to explain why all prime numbers, with the exception of 2, are odd.
Use your noticing skills to identify three similarities and three differences between these two images.
By using what you already know and your imagination to generate ideas, tell the story of the fire of London from the perspective of a young child living in London at the time.
By devising objectives such as these you are paying some attention to how students will be learning as well as what they will be learning.
b) Design tasks to encourage questioning and engagement
Match Them Up
Offer students a set of cards that need to be matched up or linked in some way.
It might be:
a set of pairs of cards like ‘It has been raining’ and ‘The river is flowing fast’ where the student is challenged to decide whether there Must be a connection between the two events, Could be a connection, or No possible connection;
a problem to select a substance (metal, clay, wax, salt, ice, …) and a change (freezes, dissolves, melts, burns, …) and decide if the change is Reversible or Irreversible;
a set of cards that students are required to match into pairs – it could be 5 graphs and 5 equations; 5 characters and 5 attitudes; 5 words and 5 definitions etc.
[The ‘Thinking Through’ series edited by David Leat has individual books for Geography, History, RE, MFL, English, Maths, Science and PSHE which all contain subject specific examples.]
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of flipping goals is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen blending the ‘what’ and the ‘how’.
I withdraw scaffolding. I use VTRs to support/guide thinking. Activities and tasks are designed to support, stretch and grow learning behaviours. More emphasis is given to problem solving and enquiry based learning.
VTRs are simple routines that apply across a wide range of subjects and contexts, and require students to think in a variety of different ways. They are used so regularly by teachers that they become woven into the fabric of the classroom culture and progressively hard-wired into the thinking practices of students. These are ways in which different ways of thinking can become routine in classrooms. They become part of the learning culture.
To be effective such routines need to be;
Direct, guide, support, encourage thinking
Short, memorable, few steps
Used over and over again
Useful in a variety of contexts
Facilitate connections, generating ideas, using knowledge
Find out more: Google ‘Visible thinking routines’
See / Think / Wonder
See Think Wonder is a visible thinking routine that encourages students to;
notice attentively and make careful observations (See)
make thoughtful interpretations
reflect on what they are noticing
make links to what they already know
distil the important bits (Think)
ask a question about what has been noticed (Wonder).
It helps stimulate curiosity and sets the stage for inquiry.
Use this routine when you want students to think carefully about why something looks the way it does or is the way it is.
Use at the beginning of a new unit to motivate student interest or try it with an object that connects to a topic during the unit of study.
Consider using it with an interesting object near the end of a unit to encourage students to further apply their new knowledge and ideas.
The routine works best when a student responds by using the three stems together at the same time, i.e., “I see…, I think…, I wonder …. “ However, you may find that students begin by using one stem at a time, and that you need to scaffold each response with a follow up question for the next stem. See/Think/Wonder is a David Perkins visible thinking routine, to be found at his visible thinking website.
The first question in this routine is flexible: it is useful when looking at objects such as works of art or historical artefacts, but it can also be used to explore a poem, make scientific observations and hypotheses, or investigate more conceptual ideas (i.e., democracy). The first question invites students to describe what they notice, see or know, but it is the supplementary question (What makes you say that?) that requires them to build explanations. It promotes evidence-based reasoning and when the students share their interpretations it encourages them to understand alternatives and multiple perspectives.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
See Think Wonder is introduced in the Noticing module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue, and further developed in iii). It also forms the basis of section 3 in Noticing.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
‘What makes you say that?’ is introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
4. Widen access to leading lessons
I offer students choices in what to learn and increasing opportunities to contribute, co-design and co-deliver aspects of learning in some areas of the curriculum. I use Jigsaw groups to facilitate collective responsibility.
a) Offer rich activities to structure whole-class collaboration.
Jigsaw methodology is used in all phases of education and importantly builds a climate of interdependence in the classroom, as each person’s activity is necessary for their colleagues to be able to learn.
The Jigsaw idea is to divide an area of enquiry into different sections, each one of which is allocated to a sub-group of the class (Aronson and Patnoe, 1997).
There are two phases to jigsaw groups:
Phase I, the sub-groups become temporary experts in their section of the project by researching what is needed. i.e. Red group with students A,B,C,D, work on one subset of the project. Blue group with students A,B,C,D, work on another subset of the project and so on
Phase II a new set of groups is then put together, each new group made up from ‘experts’ from each subset of the project i.e. all the A’s in a group. All the B’s etc.
Now the big picture of the project focus is created – students begin to create a grasp of the whole picture through each of their own efforts and understandings.
Invite students to reflect on their learning to:
compare intended with actual outcomes
evaluate their metacognitive strategies…what helped us to collaborate when? how did we handle disagreement?
analyse and draw causal relationships
pull together meanings
apply their learning to new situations
gain personal insights and learn from all their experiences.
b) Find ways to shape the curriculum around learners’ questions.
Question Dice 1
Create (or buy) two dice. One has What/Where/Who/Which/Why/How. The other has Is/Was/Could/Would/Should/Might.
Towards the end of a lesson/module, generate question stems comprising a question word and a verb by rolling the 2 dice. Ask students to create a question about the topic in hand using the question stem as a starting point.
Which xxxx could….?
Why was…….?
What might……?
“Is” will generate answers about the present, “Was/Did” …..about the past, “Can/Could” requires students to explore possibilities, “Would” requires students to consider what is probable, “Will/Should” requires students to predict/hypothesise, “Might” requires students to imagine/speculate.
Use the learners’ questions to frame the next lesson.
c) Consider ‘flipping’ the classroom.
There is much talk of the flipped classroom and of flipped learning. The terms, which are frequently used interchangeably, concern, at a basic level, what would have otherwise been covered in class being covered at home and in advance, while the subsequently freed-up classroom time is used for coaching, consolidation, practice and exploration. That which would have been classwork is done at home by the student. That which would have been homework is covered in class.
One neat addition to flipped learning is to require students not only to undertake the advance learning but also to come to the lesson with at least one question about the material – thereby building the habits of distilling what they do and do not understand and of framing a question that will help them to uncover one thing that they want to find out, or one thing they do not yet understand. It gives the teacher insight into the areas of uncertainty or interest of students and affords the opportunity to shape the classroom time in order to meet their individual interests – the seeds of co-construction, if you like.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Jigsaw Groups are introduced in the Collaborating module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
[Jigsaw Listening is introduced in the Listening module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.]
Question Dice are introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
5.Enrich the blending the ‘how’ and ‘what’ of learning.
I ensure every learning opportunity brings learning to the surface, blends content and process, captures student attention, strengthens the handling of uncertainty and working together, and guides reflection.
Use the six principles of learning power lesson design
One: Make the learning process visible
Students need to be very clear about the learning habits and processes which they are using. Teachers seek to make every aspect of the learning process as visible as possible through the language they use and through the words and images they display on the walls.
Two: Combine the ‘what’ and the ‘how’
Learning activities are designed to combine the dual objectives of ‘what’ will be learned and ‘how’ it will be learned. Students come to know that the content they are studying is a way of giving their minds a useful workout.
Three: Ensure emotional engagement
Teachers design lessons that intrigue their students. Students will not put in the effort to stretch their learning ‘muscles’ unless their energy and attention are captured by what they are doing. Emotional engagement is a prerequisite for learning that stretches and develops students’ powers of learning.
Four: Nurture handling uncertainty
What is engaging tends to be what is challenging. If education is a preparation for a learning life, students have to be helped to learn how to handle increasing degrees of complexity and uncertainty. Hence teachers create challenging tasks that stretch learning ‘muscles’.
Five: Build learning relationships
Learning is both a sociable and a solitary activity, and students need to learn how to move around in the social space of learning to best effect. Teachers enable their students to become interdependent learners who know how to handle themselves in collaborative groups.
Six: Develop reflection and responsibility
Students learn how to manage and organise their learning by being given increasingly demanding opportunities to do so. Teachers encourage their students to take charge of their own learning, planning what they do, distilling meaning from it, and revising it accordingly.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The 6 principles are explored in all modules, section 3.
5. Practical ways to grow your practice in offering rich, challenging activities
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they enjoy learning at the edge of their comfort zone, knowing that this is when learning happens. They are resilient and able to rise to challenge with confidence.
Learning is always an emotional business and learning how to manage this is best done ‘on the job’ in the course of learning rather than as a separate stand-alone activity. Emotional engagement is a prerequisite of powerful learning, it’s what gets you interested enough to be willing to put in the effort to get better and see the value of pushing yourself. So lessons aren’t just designed to make use of different kinds of learning behaviours but to give those behaviours a good work-out. Activities are designed to:
be challenging and where being stuck and confused are regular and fruitful experiences.
give students the opportunity to ‘learn what to do when they don’t know what to do’ – to work on wild tasks, rather than tame ones, where there’s plenty of scope to get lost and perplexed.
“The presence of challenging learning intentions has multiple consequences. Students can be induced to invest greater effort, and invest more of their total capacity than under low demand conditions.”
(Hattie, Visible Learning).
1. Introduce grapple tasks.
I introduce low-stakes grapple tasks where students enjoy trying hard. I remind students about what they know and can do in relation to new learning.
A good grapple problem is challenging. It’s something that the students might have an idea about but might entail something they haven’t come across or done before. A good grapple task centres on learning that is just beyond the students’ reach/experience. They give students a chance to wrestle with the problem before they have been taught methods for tackling it. They are allowed to solve it in any way they want and in doing so they are discovering their own approaches and exposing their own tricky bits.
Blend grapple tasks with Think Pair Share…giving time to think by themselves, share ideas with a partner before discussing it more widely. By using grapple tasks you are getting the students:
to build resilience;
to develop problem solving skills;
enhance collaboration and listening;
cultivate ‘having a go’;
lessen fear of mistakes.
Don’t forget to discuss which strategies were used, which were successful/effective and why.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Explore further in the Collaborating module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand support for challenging activities.
I unpack the meaning of effort with students. i.e. Using different strategies, using trial / error, using success criteria to direct action, asking for feedback. I praise effort rather than ability and offer levels of challenge that ensure the need for perseverance.
Effort is a word that teachers use frequently, but what does it mean? How might students decode this and begin to do it purposefully?
Explore what is meant by ‘effort’ with your students, and discuss with them the ways in which they might apply it.
Encourage them to come up with a definition of effort and specific examples of what it might look like in the classroom – for example by;
trying different strategies to solve a problem,
using a Visible Thinking Routine (VTR)
aiming to achieve challenging goals, or
using different un-sticking techniques when something is tricky.
paying attention to whoever is speaking.
Targeted Effort is now seen as a path to mastery. Students need to be aware of a connection between effort and improvement; that their effort is causing their improvement. This is why it is important to give effort meaning. Meaning often underpins motivation which in turn drives behaviour.
Targeted effort is effort that has direction and purpose. It is underpinned by clear guidance and the specific goal to be achieved.
What you are doing here is giving effort a size and direction. What students need to understand is that their effort has a size and a purpose.
b) Give students an idea of what effort looks like in practice.
Demonstrating a task which you expect them to complete later in the lesson.
Explain what you are doing, in terms of effort, as you go along.
Your commentary might include:
referring to success criteria to plan and direct your actions
using an unsticking strategy when you come across something tricky
looking for feedback from the class on your efforts, and adjusting your course in the face of that feedback
reminding yourself to refocus when a distraction comes along.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Effort is explored in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen students’ management of challenge.
I create, with students, challenge checklists to help scaffold greater challenge. e.g. key words to look for, steps to take, questions to ask. I encourage students to select own level of challenge and expect them to make mistakes or get stuck.
All teachers want to develop knowledge, skills and understanding in their students. They design lessons, tasks and activities that will support students to achieve this. Sometimes these are wild and open ended, but more frequently they are carefully structured to ensure the curriculum is ‘covered’ and the ‘right’ knowledge, skills and understandings are at least offered if not acquired. Indeed, it’s the mark of a good teacher that they are able to design lessons that help to achieve this – imagine for a moment a teacher who is incapable of designing such learning experiences!
But herein lies a dilemma. Teachers can design lessons, tasks and activities that scaffold the learning to the extent that the learner is given little room for manoeuvre, placing them effectively in a learning straight-jacket that ensures they follow the path, chosen by the teacher, to success. Despite the fact that they can, the question becomes should theyalways scaffold the learning so deliberately?
Classrooms are full of overly helpful adults: differentiating a little too much; explaining a little too much; talking a little too much; helping a little too much; intervening a little too often. They work with students who expect: learning to be easy; that their teacher will do the thinking for them; that their job is simply to listen.
While some lessons inevitably fall into this mode, what should the balance be like?
It is the age-old challenge of differentiation – how do we keep the learning in the extended grasp of the learner? Goldilocks difficulty – not too easy, not too hard, just right!
A teacher recently said to us:
“I became a better teacher the day I stopped thinking ‘have I made it easy enough for them to understand’ and started thinking ‘have I made it hard enough to stretch them?'”
What changes could you make in your classroom to make the learning less easy, more stretching?
b) Offer tools to guide problem based learning
A graphic organiser that is much used in primary schools to help pupils to plan their approach to an investigation or problem. The TASC wheel, derived from Thinking Actively in a Social Context, is a framework that helps develop thinking and problem-solving skills. With TASC, learners can think through a problem to the best outcome – and understand why it’s the best outcome.
TASC will guide pupils through the stages of thinking and problem-solving in an organised way, starting at one o’clock working clockwise. If you have a complex or wide-ranging problem you want to tackle, it offers a means of organising and synthesising a range of ideas.
Much like PEE (Point / Evidence / Explain) that helps pupils to structure a paragraph, the TASC wheel gives a simple way of helping pupils to sequence what they do to undertake an investigation.
c) Create an effort checklist.
Create a prompt checklist of the ways you have introduced that will help focus effort.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The TASC wheel is explored in the Planning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue, and developed further in iii).
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4.Widen access to overcome challenge.
I enable/allow students to plan their own performance goals/targets for projects etc. and pursue necessary improvements in their learning behaviours, so as to enable them to tackle trickier challenges.
Encourage students to create their own plans for seeking and engaging with challenge. These plans should include:
What’s the goal?
What are the success criteria?
What is the time frame?
Gather information about the tasks
Link new information to what I already know
Where am I expecting difficulties – blocks and obstacles?
Are there any dependencies? If this….then that….
Use the expert knowledge of others to help distil and refine my ideas
Review where I’ve got to and check my thinking against the original success criteria
Evaluate emerging outcomes against my expectations
Amend the plan or goal if necessary
Hand in on time!
b) De-structure investigations
Turn the planning of investigations in maths to students to do on their own. Just give them heaps of data and have them work in groups to plan their own investigation. Give students a list of ‘learning capacities’ they will need to use and have them identify the ones they did use.
This way of working has shown that students learn more when left to work things out for themselves and learn from their own mistakes.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
A challenge plan is introduced in the Planning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5.Enrich the climate for relishing challenge.
I build a climate of trust through which greater challenge can be attempted with relish. Enquiry based learning predominates in all areas of the curriculum.
“Appreciative inquiry” in which people are invited to;
inquire into their best experiences
imagine what might be if more of these occurred
innovate by identifying how to get more
implement changes in this cycle.
Its four stages are Discover, Dream, Design, and Destiny (Do it). The AI model is normally used by organisations but could also apply to improving team learning. AI assumes that teams have many strengths which can be harnessed to meet new challenges. The trick, therefore, is to for the team to ask themselves;
‘What are we most proud of?’
‘What do we do best in terms of how we develop our learning?’ ‘
What is it that we do that most helps to develop ourselves as a powerful team?’
‘What is the most empowering team quest we have undertaken recently?’
Rather than problematising issues, AI begins by trying to identify what happens when the team and individuals in it are working really well. This process could involve a series of interviews, the outputs of which are stories, pictures, and key-words describing things that are already going well in the desired direction of travel.
The only rule for such enquiry is that it has to begin by being wholly positive. For some people this is surprisingly difficult; it often tends to be easier to talk about problems than strengths. It’s not that people are forbidden to talk about what is not going well; rather, discussions are framed so that when they do move into more critical mode they do so in a spirit of pride and optimism, having confirmed all the many good things they are already doing. And this can make a huge difference.
After ‘Discover’ you Dream: creating a wish-list of what the team would like to do (with current constraints removed). This frees people’s minds to think more creatively. After these first two stages, the team has an agenda for action and change that isn’t encumbered by the usual excuses for inaction. From here the team moves into familiar territory—Design, a key element of any development work, and Doing that is reflective and optimistic.
Appreciative inquiry could also be applied to any aspect of teachers’ professional practice or to school practice.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Take another look at the Constructing chart. Now that you’ve got a better idea of what it is trying to show, have a go at:
checking, for understanding, the cells you were unsure about previously
making a better, more considered, estimate of where your practice lies now.
Remember… don’t expect your practice to be at the same level across all three green columns. The interest lies in perhaps discovering skills you haven’t noticed yourself using before, and revealing those skills you may need to grow.
‘My role, as teacher, is to evaluate the effect I have on my students.’ It is to ‘know thy impact’, it is to understand this impact, and it is to act on this knowing and understanding.
(P19-20, ‘Visible Learning for Teachers’ by John Hattie)
This section invites you to consider:
the impact that your changes have had on your teaching and on your classroom culture;
the impact that your changes have had on your learners;
what you might do next.
The story so far . . .
In section 1.4 you made a rough estimate of where your classroom culture was on the Constructing Learning chart.
In section 2.2 of this module you were invited to explore how the Constructing Learning classroom culture impacts on students’ learning behaviours.
As a result . . .
you have implemented some changes in relation to Constructing Learning.
Ask yourself:
What did I plan to do differently, and what impact was I hoping for?
What have you learned from this experiment about a) your teaching and b) your students, that you can take forward?
Asking why it did not work.
If the planned changes did not have the desired impact, why not?
What might have contributed to this?
With hindsight, what might you have done differently?
What will you do differently next time?
What have you learned from trying this idea out that you will take forward?
Asking ‘where next’?
Firstly, make sure that the successful changes that you have already made remain part of your teaching repertoire going forward. Just as it takes time to change students’ learning behaviours, it takes time and practice to translate teaching experiments into teaching habits.
Secondly, look back at section 1.4 again. Does that suggest anything you might wish to work on next?
Thirdly look at your students through the lens of the progression charts for learners (they are all in the download to the right). Which aspect of their learning development is most in need of attention? Does that help to focus what you might try next?
Fourthly – do not forget that you can keep revisiting these 4 modules (numbers 2/3/4/5) and trying out ever more learning-friendly approaches as you and your learners move forwards together.
Talking for learning: the sort of language content and style to enhance learning, making learning the object of conversation. The way we express ourselves in the classroom creates a powerful linguistic environment that teaches young people the best of what we know about learning. The language of learning helps students to discuss, understand, and become conscious of using their learning behaviours. It is all about creating learners who understand, and have a sophisticated language with which to discuss, the learning process.
‘The biggest effects on learning occur when teachers become learners of their own teaching, and students become their own teachers’ (Hattie).
‘Students with more elaborated conceptions of learning perform better in public examinations.’ (Watkins, London Institute.)
Finding your way through this section
In Section 3 we unpack Talking for learning: the style of language to enhance learning
Back in Section 1 you estimated where your practice was. Here you look not only at your practice but at the impact of that practice on students (see Section 3.2)
Recalculate where your practice lies for;
sharing and deepening a language for learning (section 3.3)
talking about the process of learning and encouraging positive self-talk (section 3.4)
using talk and written feedback to nudge learning forward. (section 3.5)
Scan through these sections, without detouring into toggle boxes, and look for the stage where you think your practice lies;
1 introduce (Foundational Four behaviours)
2 expand (the range of behaviours being used)
3 deepen (use of all the behaviours)
4 widen (how the behaviours are used)
5 enrich
Take a detailed look at practical ideas for your current stage of practice and the one above.
Use the ideas, and those signalled in other BLP online modules, to further grow your classroom practice.
The vocabulary of the Supple Mind creates a language of learning
Having a language that captures the richness of learning can be used to understand and discuss the learning process, helping teachers and students to uncover learning as a visible process that can improve.
The learning language offers teachers and students alike a rich vocabulary for thinking and talking about what learners actually do, and this in itself enables them to expand their capacity and appetite for learning.
The language has many uses. It helps:
teachers to think about how they might talk in a way that helps to cultivate each of the learning behaviours.
students to notice and recognise learning behaviours they were unaware of.
students to gain a better personalised understanding of content by consciously engaging the behaviours.
to know which learning habits and attitudes are being exercised by the way subjects are being presented, taught and assessed.
to understand concepts such as ‘reasoning’, ‘collaborating’, or ‘managing distractions’, and to have worked on getting better at using them purposefully and routinely.
to name such things explicitly so that students (and their parents) know what it is teachers are noticing and valuing.
teachers to become aware of which learning behaviours they routinely require students to use in lessons — and then to think more carefully about whether there might be others they might profitably call on instead.
teachers to design activities that stretch and strengthen learning behaviours so that they become student’s learning habits. Teachers begin to think, ‘How is learning happening; What habits of mind am I cultivating in students by the way we I’m designing and delivering the curriculum’; Which learning behaviours need to be used more often so that they become habits?
So as we can see it’s not just the words themselves that are powerful but the variety of functions they have in making learning behaviours visible, learnable and habitual. The learning behaviours themselves become even more useful when brought to life through everyday phrases that promote, encourage and strengthen them.
1. Three ways of talking for learning
In this section we reach down into the mechanics of teaching and learning to find things that matter. Talking for learning includes using a learning language to enable students to become conscious of their learning by:
gradually sharing and deepening a language for learning;
talking about the process of learning and encouraging positive self-talk;
using talk and written feedback to nudge learning forward.
Talk for learning is about the gradual introduction of a learning language that helps pupils to become conscious of using their learning behaviours and so build the confident self-talk of improving learners. The early stages of introducing a learning language might simply include:
using a range of physical hooks on which to hang learning talk
mention use of learning behaviours in your written feedback
start using the word ‘learning’ rather than ‘work’
foster learning dialogue in groups
have pupils relate their learning stories
The more richly children come to talk about their own learning the more they see and take hold of their own role in it.
These ideas – sharing a language, exploring the process of learning and nudging learning forward – are explored in topic 4, 5 and 6 below.
2. How does using a learning language impact on students?
Teachers as habit formers.
You are an influential habit former and, as such, will need to be mindful of how you help students to form, replace, re-form and strengthen their learning habits.
Ask yourself whether your teaching habits are helping students’ learning habits? What might you need to adapt and change?
Habits form through use and practice (deliberate or otherwise!). But desirable habits will survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them.
Take a look at this aspect of practice in more detail and, in particular, note the expected growth in student behaviours.
How developing your talking for learning has an impact on students’ growth as learners.
Developing a deep understanding of Talking for Learning – how teacher behaviours may grow over time, and how learner behaviours may respond.
Here we take a deep look at how these teaching behaviours change over time and the impact they have on learning behaviours as the classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly.
In the green boxes on the left-hand side we map the incremental shifts in teaching behaviours (you have already met these in section 1), and in the blue boxes on the right-hand side the anticipated outcomes for learners. Remember that progression in learning behaviours is likely to lag behind progression in teaching behaviours as it takes time for learners to discern and respond to the cultural changes that teachers are making.
Also, even if it is possible to make a step-change in classroom culture and jump directly towards the top of the green columns, do not be tempted to do so – your learners will not yet have the necessary skills and attitudes to keep pace. Aim to make slow and steady progress, one cell / row at a time.
Progression in Talking for learning:
There are three aspects of Talking for Learning classroom culture:
Sharing a language of learning;
Exploring learning as a process;
Nudging learning forward.
And two key learner outcomes:
Growing a language of learning;
Growing an understanding of learning.
All 5 have their own development trajectories, the detailed steps as classrooms become increasingly learning-friendly. Below is the progression chart for how these 5 inter-related aspects might grow over time as teacher behaviours and learning behaviours develop.
Ask yourself:
Which of the green cells best describe my current teaching behaviours?
Which of the blue cells best describe my students’ learning behaviours?
Is there any connection between your teaching behaviours and their learning behaviours?
Thinking about moving on:
If your students are mostly in Blue row 1, try adopting teaching behaviours in Green row 2. Similarly, Blue 2 means trying Green 3 etc.
3. Practical ways to grow your practice in creating the language of learning
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are aware of and use a sophisticated learning language drawn from the school’s chosen language and further refined by the school’s progression map, to underpin their understanding of the learning process.
Building powerful learners is all about being able to:
name
recognise
talk about using
select for use when appropriate
become skilled in using
evaluate the effect of
key learning behaviours
Using and extending the language of learning adds breadth and depth to how teachers and learners talk about, understand and improve learning.
Emotional language – how we feel The first aspect of the language framework is about helping students to lock onto learning; to resist distraction; to become absorbed and to stay engaged despite the ebb and flow of learning. Learning behaviours include; absorption, managing distraction, attentive noticing, perseverance.
Cognitive language – how we think The second aspect of the learning powered mind is about being able to draw on a wide range of learning methods or ways of thinking. Learning behaviours include; questioning, making links, imagination, reasoning, capitalising.
Social language – how we relate The next aspect of the supple learning mind is about being able to make use of relationships in the pursuit of learning. Learning behaviours include; inter-dependence, collaboration, empathy and attentive listening, imitation.
Strategic language – how we manage our learning The fourth aspect of a supple learning mind is about building the ability to be reflective, to manage the learning process, to think profitably about learning and ourselves as learners; to become meta-learners. Learning behaviours include; planning, revising or refining, distilling, meta-learning.
Use of the language becomes essential in what people notice about learning. When used abundantly it makes learning visible and public.
1. Introduce the language of the learning behaviours being considered.
I use metaphors and stories to introduce the language and meaning of specific key learning behaviours… . Persevering, Questioning, Collaborating, Revising… so that students can talk about and recognise the behaviours in use.
Using the word work to describe classroom activity.
For example “Get on with your work” or “Have you finished your work” or “Where is your homework?”
To:
Learning
Using the word learning to describe classroom activity.
For example “How is your learning coming along?” or “Is this piece of learning finished” or Home learning
Teachers have traditionally talked much more about ‘work’ than they have about ‘learning’. One study carried out in London schools in 2002 compared the frequency of use of these two words, and found that ‘work’ was used 98% of the time, and ‘learning’ only 2%.
Research has found that when classroom activity is called learning or ‘play’ groups find the activity more pleasurable than when it’s referred to as ‘work’. Students also become much more locked on to it, their minds wander much less, they are more imaginative, and they learn more from the activity.
Now there is nothing wrong with the word ‘work’ but it doesn’t invite you to get interested in the activity itself. You will be pleasantly surprised at the effect on your students if you talk less about ‘work’ and more about the process of learning itself.
b) Invest toys or puppets with learning habits
Help students to understand the learning behaviours (like Collaborating, Persevering or Questioning) by having toys that are endowed with the behaviours. It may well be that you start with only a few behaviours / soft toys which are added to over time.
The toys help students make ready links between the behaviour and the toys. However, these will work even better if the toy…animal, bird, fish etc… is in nature invested with the characteristics of that learning behaviour. Don’t just work with alliterations like…cat and capitalising. Better to have an Emperor Penguin to represent Interdependence…and why would that be?
c) Use Clip Art icons as an aide-memoire for learning behaviours
You could simply ‘borrow’ these, but much better to get students to design and agree their own as a means of developing a conversation about the meaning of learning and growing your own learning language.
Having agreed a set of icons, think about how you could use them to remind students of how they need to be / are learning.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of using Animals / puppets / icons to scaffold students’ thinking is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand the learning language across a wide range of behaviours.
I introduce the language and meaning of a wider range of learning behaviours so as to build up students’ understanding of learning appropriate to different curriculum needs. e.g. imagining, reasoning, planning, listening.
a) Extend talk about learning behaviours… turn fictional characters into learning heroes
click to enlarge
A popular way to extend familiarity with learning behaviours is to consider the learning behaviours of well-known fictional characters. Look at characters from children’s books through the lens of learning power – which learning powers does the cat possess in Room on the Broom or the fox in Fantastic Mr Fox and so forth.
b) Extend understanding of learning behaviours…link them to understanding famous characters.
Help students to make links between familiar famous characters and the learning behaviours that they may have possessed.
The famous character might be a prominent sporting hero, someone from TV, a politician, a character being studied in a novel, a well-known person from History. . .
The point is to help students to understand how the learning behaviours are linked and contribute to the success of the chosen character.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Learning Power Heroes. Read more about Learning Heroes in this book:
3. Deepen the lexicon of learning language.
I deepen and expand how I talk about learning by using / referencing appropriate levels of BLP or the school’s progression charts for all key learning behaviours.
A key consideration of learning power is how the dispositions grow and how students become more skilled over time. In terms of the 4 key learning behaviours, teachers’ language may, at first, be restricted to encouraging learners to ‘stick at it’ or to ‘work in a group’ or ‘ask more questions’ or ‘think about what you have learned’. Learners’ understanding will inevitably suffer from these limitations.
Using the progression charts to talk about and explore learning enriches the learning language.
In increasing students’ disposition to persevere…what was previously ‘stick at it’ becomes:
What might you do to get unstuck?
You could use the stuck poster for an idea
What is putting you off? How might you deal with this?
What are you looking to achieve?
If it is not difficult, you are practising what you can already do!
That is an interesting mistake.
What might you do to avoid that mistake in future?
How are you going to make sure you get this done?
This is tricky, but I can see you are enjoying the struggle.
The same, of course, would happen using similar trajectories for the other key behaviours. Take a look at the progression charts for questioning, collaboration and revising in the Putting xxx into Learning modules. Think about how the progression steps will provoke the broadening and deepening of your learning language. Work together to figure out how you could create and enrich your understanding of these behaviours by creating a language for how you talk about them. How would you use these trajectories to deepen your students’ understanding and enrich their learning language?
It’s also worth thinking about using the ideas and phrases in the progression charts to:
enrich your reports to parents;
support target setting;
enhance academic mentoring;
refine intended learning outcomes.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Progression charts for learning behaviours are in section 1 of each module.
4. Widen access to the language of learning.
I use ‘Could-be’ language so as to enable students to become more thoughtful, imaginative, critical. I invite students to become more inquisitive members of a knowledge-checking, knowledge-developing community.
The importance of using ‘Could-Be’ language is well researched. It encourages more genuine engagement with what is being taught; how pupils will question and solve problems more readily if knowledge is presented as provisional. It’s about shifting the tone to more tentative, less cut and dried. The opposite is ‘Is’ language which positions the learner as knowledge consumers where their job is to try and understand and remember. ‘Could be’ language immediately invites pupils to be more thoughtful, critical or imaginative about what they are hearing or reading. For more on using ‘could be’ language, see page 69-71 in The Learning Powered School
Could be language includes phrase like;
In most case
may on occasion
wide variety
could be
probably
possibly
most often
there are other ways
one of which
some people think that…
If you say definitively that something is the case, students take it literally and try to remember it. But if you say, of the same thing, that it could be the case, they become more engaged, more thoughtful, more imaginative, and more critical. That ‘could be’ invites students to become more active, inquisitive members of the knowledge-checking, knowledge-developing community, rather than to see themselves as merely doing their best to understand and remember something that is already cut and dried.
b) Turn pessimistic to optimistic student talk.
From:
Pessimistic student talk
‘I can never understand what my teacher is going on about’, or ‘Maths is always too hard for me’
To:
Optimistic student talk
‘I am finding it really hard to understand this today; maybe I should look back at what I did last time.’
‘I know I can get stressed when I have to calculate angles, so I’ll look at my checklist to remind me how I get started.’
Words like ‘never’ and ‘always’ can be damaging to learners. When students say ‘I can never understand what my teacher is going on about’, or ‘Maths is always too hard for me’, it suggests a pessimistic view of learning that’s unlikely to cultivate persistence, and if it goes on it assumes the status of something that is permanent and unalterable. If ‘always’ or ‘never’ become sentences to fail for ever they breed a kind of learned helplessness. Keep a look out for such perceptions and help students to re-frame them.
Dialogue in which learners explain things to each other enhances understanding. As learners become more adept in talking themselves through problems and contexts, their “outer speech” develops, and so does their “inner speech”, giving greater power of self-direction.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of using ‘Could Be’ is introduced in the Imagining module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5. Enrich the learning language.
I now use the language of learning fluently for all learning behaviours so as to stimulate effective learning. Students imitate this differentiated use of learning-friendly language.
Teachers who have become confident with BLP almost always find that the kind of language they use is different from what it was before. Their classroom talk is all focused on the process and the experience of learning itself. During an activity, as teachers go around helping students and checking on their progress, they quite easily start using more of the kinds of prompts and questions that are shown overleaf. They have, in effect, started to speak ‘Learnish’!
Nudging connecting
What does that remind you of?
What do you know that might help?
What would be a good analogy for that?
Nudging self-evaluation
Tell me about that
What are you not so pleased with?
How would you do it differently next time?
What would even better look like?
Nudging self awareness?
Does this way of working play to your strengths?
How could you organise yourself to help you learn better?
What learning behaviours would it help you to strengthen?
b) Take the conversation to another level . . . .
Thus far students have been reflecting on whether and / or how frequently they have been using various learning behaviours. Use this Rating Wheel to get them reflecting on how well they have used these behaviours.
Challenge students to explain why they believe they have used the behaviour effectively. How could you use their answers to build definitions of effective learning behaviours?
Teacher talk
Which learning behaviours have you had occasion to use today/this week?
Which have you used most often?
I notice you have completely coloured in the reasoning segment. So what does that mean? What does good reasoning mean to you?
Which one of the learning behaviours do you want to improve and learn to do better?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The ‘How Well’ rating wheel is introduced in the Meta Learning module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4. Practical ways to grow your practice in exploring learning as a process
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . through a deep understanding of learning, they are able to describe their learning character, their strengths and relative weaknesses with precision. This awareness of self as learner fuels their confidence and independence.
Deep talk about learning is what sets learning powered classrooms apart. Learning and how it works isn’t just talked about at the beginning of a term or year but is embedded in the everyday conversations of the classroom.
Conversations will include noticing things about learning:
What do we mean when we say learning?
When and where is it best?
What helps you to do it?
How does it feel? What hinders your learning?
It goes on into encouraging students to talk about their learning:
What made it so good?
What did you contribute?
How did you make sense of that?
And later learners can be enabled to become meta-learners with questions such as:
How do you plan to go about learning?
How will you monitor how it’s going?
How can you review how your learning has gone?
All the while a general interest in learning can be kept fresh by references to media reports and articles about the brain and the mind…. visualisation in sport coaching, or what happens to learning in Alzheimer’s disease, or how babies learn to talk.
Learning as a process is brought to life by making it the subject of conversations.
1. Introduce and promote noticing learning.
I introduce the practice of talking about learning; sometimes stopping the flow of learning to notice and bring attention to the process of learning. “What does it feel like?’ ‘How did using xxx feel/work?’
Keep an eye on the learning behaviours that your students are using, and take the opportunity to talk to them about it. Hard to plan for, because it is ‘in the moment’ opportunism, and easy to forget in the hurly burly of the busy classroom. Even if learners do not, as yet, fully understand the key learning behaviours of Perseverance, Questioning, Collaborating and Revising, they will exhibit these behaviours, even if they are not conscious of doing so. Use these opportunities to slow the classroom down and open up a short discussion about the successful behaviour that you have spotted. Such interludes have a number of benefits:
It signals to learners the teacher’s interest in learning behaviours.
It alerts learners to the behaviours that they already command.
It begins to explore the complexity of the 4 key behaviours.
It encourages students to observe and learn from the successful habits of others.
It opens up opportunities for meta cognitive talk.
b) Students looking for learning.
As you introduce a learning behaviour encourage students to notice when they use it and to briefly record what they have done—imagined something, used a good question, managed a distraction and so on —on a sticky note which they stick on a Learning Tree wall display.
Be on a constant look-out for the behaviours you have been explaining, encouraging and enabling, which students too capture through photographs or on sticky notes and add to the Learning Tree. This ‘looking for learning’ is further enhanced by ‘learning detectives’: two children who are assigned this role each day and who look for good learning behaviours in others and again add them to the Learning Tree. At the end of the day the Learning Tree offers a rich source of information to reflect on, explain, and reinforce through a whole-class learning power discussion.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Explore these ideas further in the Meta Learning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand learning as a process by including reflection.
I enable students to reflect on the effectiveness of any new learning strategy they are / have been using; how they applied it; when to use it again. Learning is becoming visible to students.
Set aside an area of display where students are asked to share any strategies or ‘top tips’ that they have found particularly helpful in their own learning. For those offering the ‘top tip’, it is a distilling activity, but the resulting gallery of ‘top tips’ invites students to adopt the successful strategies of others.
This will also support the skills of noticing, collaborating, and distilling.
Teacher talk
Who has a top tip to add to the board today?
What made you think of that way of doing it?
Well done, you worked this out for yourself.
Can you try to do this without that tool? Can you work it out in your head?
What else might be helpful?
b) How will you find that out?
This routine helps students to take stock of what they need to find out and to consider the strategies they might use to achieve it. It encourages metacognitive thinking about which learning strategy is most likely to lead to success. The routine has two questions:
What do you need to know / understand ?
Which strategy is most likely to be successful ?
The natural place to use this routine is when students are beginning to understand what they need to find out but before they make a choice from a range of learning strategies.
Teacher Talk
What do you need to know about this?
Is that important?
What sort of things might you need to find out?
So how/where will you look for ideas?
What are the options?
Which will be quicker?
Where are you likely to find more detail?
Do you need detail at this stage?
To distil and communicate new learning
You could ask yourself why this makes sense/looks right/sounds right to you.
You could ask yourself whether this will make sense/look right/sound right to others. And whether that matters.
If you had to sum this up, what would you say?
Could you distil/refine these ideas any further?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of students choosing between different strategies is introduced in the Capitalising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue, and further developed Beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
3. Deepen understanding of learning by reflecting at a distance.
I encourage/enable students to use Learning Journals / Logs to capture their learning journey and recognise new understandings about their learning.
to build self-awareness and capture behaviours. Here students record their thoughts, feelings, and progress about learning. Some schools use the more formalised learning log pages from TLO’s on-line Transition Activity Bank. Different pages prompt students to notice themselves using a learning behaviour over the course of a week—at school, at home, and elsewhere—and to note briefly what they did. For example, for Making Links they might note; ‘When I built on the knowledge I already had’, ‘When I used an analogy to better understand something’, ‘When I met something new and asked myself how is this the same, and how is it different from things I already know?’
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of using learning journals is expanded on in the Revising module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
4. Widen understanding of learning by enabling students to reflect profitably on others’ learning.
I introduce peer assessment / critique and emphasise being Kind, Specific, Helpful, ensuring all students benefit from being taught how to help each other improve.
To move beyond peer assessment towards whole group assessment:
Set this up with plenty of notice and make it clear to students that their work will be seen by an audience.
Agree with students a valid set of success criteria for their work. This could then be used to drive and sustain their progress through the unit. Include opportunities to draft/edit/improve
Use Kind, Specific, Helpful critique for feedback (as in Ron Berger’s Austin’s Butterfly – see below)
The audiences could be:
another teacher.
a visitor.
members of SLT willing to come and witness the ‘performance’.
all the school.
‘performance’ becomes a ‘pop-up’ learning exhibition somewhere in the school.
students create and include QR code links to their displays and invite Kind, Specific, Helpful comments from all who see them.
students show their learning in silence to each other and provides KSH feedback on sticky-notes. Feedback is collated and acted on in silence.
b) Engage students giving feedback that is kind, specific and helpful
Ron Berger’s Ethic of Excellence
Build a culture of critique
Plan formal critique sessions, where students may show a piece of work, explaining their ideas and what they were trying to achieve. Students are then encouraged to critique the work, but using the rules that it must be:
Kind
Specific
Helpful
Students should be encouraged to phrase their critique as questions e.g. ‘Have you thought about…..?’ As a result of this feedback from their peers, students improve their work over time. This is demonstrated brilliantly, by this short video.
Just watch, be amazed and try similar approaches with students.
c) Use talk like this to engage learners in meta-cognitive talk:
To maintain motivation when the going is tough
How could you use what you sorted out in your head last week to help you now?
I can see that you are really enjoying wrestling with . . .
What are you doing to keep yourself going?
I used to……..and found it really helpful for getting me through the tricky patches
What’s your secret of keeping going on this?
Is this working for you? Do you ever get downhearted? And then what do you do?
Believe in yourself and what you are doing.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of using peer feedback is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5. Enrich learning as a life skill by drawing on current accounts.
I feed and supplement students’ understanding of learning as a life skill by referencing media reports about the brain, the mind, visualisation in sport, how babies learn to talk etc.
Use articles such as these (Science Daily) to develop conversations about learning. Explore it as a subject of vital and ongoing research and interest.
Oct. 14, 2020 — Although experts say using electronic media while doing schoolwork negatively impacts learning, many students believe they’re immune to any ill effects because they’re good multitaskers, …
Oct. 13, 2020 — An expert in creativity and innovation is calling for schools and universities to increase their emphasis on teaching creativity, as new research shows it is a core competency across all disciplines …
b) Find professional articles for discussion with both colleagues and students
c) Find or make inspirational quotes about learning
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Keep an eye on the newspapers and TV news.
Pintrest has lots of motivational stuff, but select with care!
Ted Talks are worth exploring on You Tube.
5. Practical ways to grow your practice in nudging learning forward
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are sufficiently independent and confident to act on their own internal feedback. They decide for themselves whether something reaches the standards that they have set themselves and take pride in their achievements.
The language of learning can help teachers to think about how they might talk in a way that helps to cultivate the learning behaviours and help students to gain a better personalised understanding of content.
Teachers can turn each of the learning behaviours into sets of casual prompts or nudges to move students along in learning. For example, to nudge curiosity/questioning: “What’s odd about that? What does that make you wonder? What do you want to find out? How else could you do that?”
Teachers’ classroom talk is all focused on the process and experience of learning itself. Sometimes teacher comments encourage students to pay attention to how they are learning. Teacher comments ask them to slow down and notice and appraise the strategies and steps they are using along the way. E.g. “What would have made this easier for you? Where else could you use that?” This helps students to become more reflective and thoughtful about their own learning.
Promoting self-talk
Since we want young people to turn out to be robust confident learners we have to talk with them in terms of a growth mindset.
Teachers develop their students’ interest in the learnable skills and strategies.
Teacher comments focus on effort, habit and disposition, focusing students on how to get better by looking for ways to try harder or differently.
Students are steered away from carving the world into things they are ‘good at’ or ‘not good at’.
Feedback prompts
In the learning centred classroom feedback can be seen at three levels. Notice that all the prompts ask rather than tell.
Task-Level Feedback Prompts (adapted from Nuckles et al, 2009)
• Does this answer meet the success criteria? • Is this right? • Could you elaborate on this answer?
Process-Level Feedback Prompts (adapted from Nuckles et al, 2009)
• What strategies are you using? • Are there more efficient strategies you could use?
Self-Regulation-Level Feedback prompts (adapted from Nuckles et al, 2009)
• What would be the best way of checking your work? • How could you reflect on these answers?
1. Introduce how to recognise a learning behaviour.
I point out (praise / recognise) to students when they use a specific key learning behaviour effectively. Together we establish learners’ rights and responsibilities for using learning behaviours.
Work in pairs and small groups to suggest a charter of matching rights and responsibilities or ground rules for collaboration. If everyone has a right to have their voice heard, everyone also has a responsibility to listen attentively to others and wait until they have finished speaking. What else might be important and why?
b) Talk to learn purposefully with others
Who will you choose to work / learn with on this?
Do their skills complement yours?
Who else might you need to involve?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of students deciding ‘Rights and Responsibilities’ is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand nudging through self-recognition/noticing.
I suggest students slow down in order to notice and appraise the strategies and steps they are using in learning across a growing range of learning behaviours.
Examples of written feedback that name the types of learning behaviours being used. Using the learning language enables you to be more precise about the sort of learning effort a student has used. Beneficially this means that you notice more precisely how students are learning.
click to enlarge
Here, Miss Delaney tells Thomas he is a brilliant imitator. She has noticed that he successfully used his Imitation ‘muscle’ to draw like Van Gogh. She is making him aware of this, and praising him for it.
click to enlarge
And here, feedback helps Matthew to understand how his ‘super reasoning skills’ helped to assure success. The teacher is intentionally linking these learning behaviours and curricular success.
b) Point out learning behaviours being used.
In Oral feedback
Looking out for learning behaviour, noticing students doing it, talking about it and nudging them forward is the name of the game.
For example, if you were wanting to help students to evaluate progress towards a goal, you might use phrases like:
Do you think that’s coming along well?
Have you checked your emerging outcome against your original goals?
Are you still on track?
What would make you change tack?
Did you have to amend your goals part way through? Why was that?
What are you going to do about . . . . . ?
Do you think there’s anything you could have done better, differently?
How might you get better at that? What would be a better/alternative way of doing it?
Are you satisfied with how it is going?
But what prompts/nudges would you use in relation the effectiveness of a team? Or to the quality of the questions being generated? Or the extent to which the work was sufficiently challenging?
Ask – To what extent would you need to ‘plan’ your informal oral feedback?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
All modules, section 2, i) / ii) / iii) / iv) conclude the ‘More ideas to choose from’ section with ideas for teacher talk and if/then targets that are learning behaviour specific and tailored to the phase of development.
3. Deepen nudging by offering effective feedback on both content and process.
I offer encouraging feedback on both the Task, Process and Self-Regulation of learning. e.g. T ‘could you elaborate’, P ‘What other questions could you ask? SR self-corrected errors.
a) Encouraging feedback to support the use of learning behaviours
Supportive marking comments
If developing learning is to be as important as successfully acquiring knowledge and skills, your feedback needs to reflect this.
Task related feedback might include:
Does this answer meet the success criteria?
Is this right?
Could you elaborate on this answer?
What aspect of your response to this assignment are you pleased with/unhappy about?
What other information do you need to meet the criteria?
What’s the sticking point in this task?
Feedback to support the process of learning might include:
What strategies are you using?
Are there more efficient strategies you could use?
What other Qs could you ask about this task?
Do you grasp the concept underpinning this task?
Have you done anything similar to this before?
Feedback to support Self-regulation might include:
How could you reflect on these answers?
What happened when you …?
How can you account for …?
What learning goals have you achieved?
How have your ideas changed?
What aspect of this work could you now teach to others?
What would be the best way of checking your work?
b) Talk to access appropriate expertise
Where will you look for the information you need?
You could check your ideas out with….
If xx thinks differently about this what will you do?
Would you stick with your ideas, shift them a bit or switch to their ideas? How confident are you about this?
If you ask lots of other knowledgeable people/go to other sources and they are all a bit different how will you reconcile that?
Who is best placed to help you?
How will you use xxx’s ideas in future?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of using Task, Process and Self-Regulation levels of feedback is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, iv) Moving beyond Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
4. Widen nudging to self-nudging.
I create regular opportunities for students to evaluate their own and others’ work using constructive feedback. Talk Partners develop feedback processes of constructive exchange.
The well-known Assessment for Learning technique of 3 stars and a wish is frequently used by teachers to fashion their feedback to learners, but here we are suggesting that learners use it themselves to structure feedback to each other. The strategy fits well with feedback that is Kind, Specific and Helpful as considered in ‘Austin’s Butterfly’.
But you are playing a longer game here. While in the early stages students give and receive feedback from their peers, you are really laying the foundations of students acting as their own ‘critical friend’, judging their own efforts (3 stars) and considering what more needs to be done (a wish). It is a shift of responsibility towards the learner to evaluate their efforts against the agreed success criteria and, eventually, against their own self-imposed standards.
b)Talk to regulate their own learning
When do you find it best to take a moment to review what you have done and how you have done it?
Give yourself some ‘think time’ if you feel you need it
Play to your strengths
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Look in the Revising module, section 2, iii) and iv) for similar ideas.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
5. Enrich feedback that makes a difference.
I offer feedback that alters what I and students do next both in relation to content and process. I frame feedback as questions to continually provoke curiosity. e.g. ‘How could you make that more expressive?’
a) Use feedback to link learning behaviours to curriculum success.
What you feel is sufficiently important to give written feedback on speaks volumes about what you believe is important. Does your feedback adequately reflect your commitment to building better learners?
Your well-reasoned argument is well researched and convincing. A couple of other sources would be useful.
I want you to look critically at this piece of learning. Does it meet the criteria? Is it good enough for you? How could it be even better?
Are you happy that this meets the standards that you have set for yourself? Does it accomplish what you intended? How would you assess the piece against your own criteria?
b) Talk to evaluate progress towards the goal
Do you think that’s coming along well?
Have you checked your emerging outcome against your original goals?
Are you still on track?
What would make you change track?
Did you have to amend your goals part way through? Why was that?
What are you going to do about . . . . . ?
Do you think there’s anything you could have done better, differently?
How might you get better at that? What would be a better/alternative way of doing it?
Are you satisfied with how it is going?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
A challenge plan is introduced in the Planning module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
6. Exploring your journey
Take another look at the Talking chart. Now that you’ve got a better idea of what it is trying to show, have a go at:
checking, for understanding, the cells you were unsure about previously
making a better, more considered, estimate of where your practice lies now.
Remember… don’t expect your practice to be at the same level across all three green columns. The interest lies in perhaps discovering skills you haven’t noticed yourself using before, and revealing those skills you may need to grow.
‘My role, as teacher, is to evaluate the effect I have on my students.’ It is to ‘know thy impact’, it is to understand this impact, and it is to act on this knowing and understanding.
(P19-20, ‘Visible Learning for Teachers’ by John Hattie)
This section invites you to consider:
the impact that your changes have had on your teaching and on your classroom culture;
the impact that your changes have had on your learners;
what you might do next.
The story so far . . .
In section 1.4 you made a rough estimate of where your classroom culture was on the Talking for Learning chart.
In section 2.2 of this module you were invited to explore how the Talking for Learning classroom culture impacts on students’ learning behaviours.
As a result . . .
you have implemented some changes in relation to Talking for Learning.
Ask yourself:
What did I plan to do differently, and what impact was I hoping for?
What have you learned from this experiment about a) your teaching and b) your students, that you can take forward?
Asking why it did not work.
If the planned changes did not have the desired impact, why not?
What might have contributed to this?
With hindsight, what might you have done differently?
What will you do differently next time?
What have you learned from trying this idea out that you will take forward?
Asking ‘where next’?
Firstly, make sure that the successful changes that you have already made remain part of your teaching repertoire going forward. Just as it takes time to change students’ learning behaviours, it takes time and practice to translate teaching experiments into teaching habits.
Secondly, look back at section 1.4 again. Does that suggest anything you might wish to work on next?
Thirdly look at your students through the lens of the progression charts for learners (they are all in the download to the right). Which aspect of their learning development is most in need of attention? Does that help to focus what you might try next?
Fourthly – do not forget that you can keep revisiting these 4 modules (numbers 2/3/4/5) and trying out ever more learning-friendly approaches as you and your learners move forwards together.
Relating for learning: the changing roles and responsibilities of teachers and learners, where learning becomes a shared responsibility. Students are given more responsibility for their own learning, your role as a teacher changes from being ‘the sage on the stage’ to ‘the guide by your side’ while the role of students moves from being ‘passengers’ to ‘crew’ and ultimately ‘pilots of their own learning’.
‘The biggest effects on learning occur when teachers become learners of their own teaching, and students become their own teachers’ (Hattie).
Finding your way through this section
In Section 2 we unpack Relating for learning: gradually devolving responsibility for learning
Back in Section 1 you estimated where your practice was. Here you look not only at your practice but at the impact of that practice on students (see Section 2.2)
Recalculate where your practice lies for;
devolving responsibility (section 2.3)
coaching approaches (section 2.4)
modelling learning (section 2.5)
Scan through these sections, without detouring into toggle boxes, and look for the stage where you think your practice lies;
1 introduce (Foundational Four behaviours)
2 expand (the range of behaviours being used)
3 deepen (use of all the behaviours)
4 widen (how the behaviours are used)
5 enrich
Take a detailed look at practical ideas for your current stage of practice and the one above.
Use the ideas, and those signalled in other BLP online modules, to further grow your classroom practice.
The more structured we make the environment the more structure the students need. The more we decide for students the more they expect us to decide. The more motivation we provide the less they find within themselves. The more responsibility for learning we try to assume the less they accept on their own. The more control we exert the more restive their response.
Weimar 2002.
1. Three ways of relating for learning
What it would be beneficial to do is to leave the 3 aspects of relating separately here but then try to blend them together into a single column of teacher development. We’ve done this trick before with the original grids of behaviours ie perseverance, blended into a single column for pupil progression.
In this section we reach down into the mechanics of teaching and learning to find things that matter. Relating for learning includes making learning a shared responsibility:
you gradually offer students more responsibility;
you become a learning coach, giving attention to the how of learning;
you model how to approach learning in a range of situations.
Relating for learning is about making learning a shared responsibility to avoid learners becoming over dependent on teachers and building their skills as independent learners. In the early stages, devolving more responsibility to learners might simply include:
creating opportunities for students to ask more questions;
offering students ways of getting themselves unstuck;
giving students responsibility for monitoring their learning.
Despite giving more responsibility to learners it still leaves you with plenty to do! Your role becomes one of modelling learning processes and styling your teaching as a learning coach.
These ideas – sharing responsibility, coaching and modelling – are explored in topics 3, 4 and 5 below.
IF slimming the teacher development grid is successful this and the next 3 sections will diminish by 2/3 rds. But see below for other suggestions.
2. How does developing relationships impact on students?
Teachers as habit formers.
You are an influential habit former and, as such, will need to be mindful of how you help students to form, replace, re-form and strengthen their learning habits.
Ask yourself whether your teaching habits are helping students’ learning habits? What might you need to adapt and change?
Habits form through use and practice (deliberate or otherwise!). But desirable habits will survive and flourish better if students are aware of them, realise their value and strive to improve them.
Take a look at this aspect of practice in more detail and, in particular, note the expected growth in student behaviours.
How developing your teaching relationships has an impact on students’ growth as learners.
Developing a deep understanding of Relating for Learning – how teacher behaviours may grow over time, and how learner behaviours may respond.
Here we take a deep look at how these teaching behaviours change over time and the impact this may have on learning behaviours as the classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly.
In the green boxes on the left-hand side we map the incremental shifts in teaching behaviours (you have already met these in section 1), and in the blue boxes on the right-hand side the anticipated outcomes for learners. Remember that progression in learning behaviours is likely to lag behind progression in teaching behaviours as it takes time for learners to discern and respond to the cultural changes that teachers are making.
Also, even if it is possible to make a step-change in classroom culture and jump directly towards the top of the green columns, do not be tempted to do so – your learners will not yet have the necessary skills and attitudes to keep pace. Aim to make slow and steady progress, one cell / row at a time.
Progression in Relating for Learning.
The three aspects of Relating for Learning are:
Devolving Responsibility;
Coaching approaches;
Modelling learning.
And two anticipated learner outcomes are:
Growing motivation;
Growing independence.
All 5 aspects have their own development trajectories, the detailed steps as classrooms become increasingly learning-friendly. The progression chart below shows how these 5 inter-related aspects might grow over time as teacher behaviours and learning behaviours develop.
Which of the green cells best describe my current teaching behaviours?
Which of the blue cells best describe my students’ learning behaviours?
Is there any connection between my teaching behaviours and their learning behaviours?
Thinking about moving on:
If your students are mostly in Blue row 1, try adopting teaching behaviours in Green row 2. Similarly, Blue 2 means trying Green 3 etc.
3. Ideas for growing your practice in devolving responsibility
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are committed to their learning and are eager to take full responsibility for themselves as developing and improving learners. They expect to frame and answer their own questions, and seek expertise both within and out with the school as appropriate.
It’s in these toggles that we would need to give more and wider ideas and where to go to find them across all the other units.
An important way of surfacing learning is to let students do more of it; to become more active in the learning process. Active learners are not only offered more opportunities to decide what to do, but are also actively learning through the explicit review of their own experience.
The focus on students’ activity is learning rather than performing, hence the teacher makes sure that:
there’s plenty of collaborative activity, since this helps students to see each other as resources (not rivals) for learning;
students can make choices about what and how to learn (high levels of learner autonomy);
students experience failure as a necessary and useful part of learning (tolerating uncertainty, mess, error and initial failure);
students are given a chance to talk more – and adults talking less;
students experience more open-ended activities – and create their own;
students have more opportunity to spend longer on an activity, to feed their interest/engagement in it;
students establish high-level goals for their own learning, based on challenge and quality feedback including their own;
students have access to learning experiences that are under– rather than over engineered, with elements of ambiguity;
students can decide on admissible outcomes.
This shift to more learner involvement offers deep professional satisfaction and a new set of learning relationships.
1.Introducehow to become aware of their learning.
I introduce students to simple self-monitoring tools to help them to become more aware of what’s happening as they learn.
a) Have students monitor their own learning climate.
Use laminated card and a clothes peg. Print on Absorbed – Distracted or Too Easy – Too Hard or Stuck – Doing Fine? Interested – Bored. etc. Laminate and provide a peg. Have students use them during lessons to help them monitor and become more conscious of their feelings about learning. This is just a small beginning in devolving the responsibility for learning towards the learners.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The idea of students self-monitoring learning is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
The idea of students using laminated card and clothes pegs as markers is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
2. Expand students’ opportunities to talk and learn together more.
I offer students more opportunities to ask their own questions in order to develop their curiosity. I develop collaborative teamwork such that students see each other as learning resources for one another.
The basic building block of collaboration is pair work. Through brief and focused conversations, peers get the opportunity to voice their thoughts and start a dialogue about them. TPS is a well-known strategy for ensuring that students build up to learning in a team. One way of using this might be to; Pose a question or problem, give pupils 1 minute to think individually about their own personal response; give 2 minutes in pairs to compare their first reactions with a partner; give fours 3 minutes to share their views in a group. Use as a simple strategy to prepare pupils for working together in teams. As an alternative, try Think/Link/Together which achieves the same outcomes. Think Link Together [pdf]
b) A Visible Thinking Routine – Think, Puzzle, Explore – A routine that sets the stage for deeper, independent inquiry.
At the outset of a topic, ask these three questions:
What do you think you know about this topic?
What questions or puzzles do you have?
How can you explore this topic?
The first helps students to connect with prior knowledge, allowing you to understand what they do and do not already know/understand. This aspect alone helps us to shape the upcoming learning to their existing understandings and so they are making an input in to curriculum design.
The second invites curiosity and begins to identify lines of enquiry that they might wish to pursue. Their questions, not ours!
The third (which you may choose to delay until questions 1 and 2 have been sorted) offers them the opportunity to make decisions about what they want to explore and how they want to explore it.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Think Puzzle Explore is introduced in the Questioning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start there for more teaching ideas.
Think Pair Share is introduced in the Collaboration module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
3.Deepen students’ experience of monitoring a variety of learning behaviours.
I encourage students to watch for, then monitor and evaluate, their use of a variety of learning behaviours. I use If-Then planning to help students harness their motivation.
a) Put ‘If-then’ planning into action in your classroom to build habits quickly
If we want students to change their behaviour we need to help them to think much more closely about the ‘hows’ and the ‘whats’. Motivation research proposes an effective solution to this called ‘if-then’ planning.‘Ifs’ are the situations you want to remind yourself about. ‘Thens’ are what you will do about something; the action you will take. Brainstorm a list of the ‘what we might do in response to the Ifs’.
Research findings
Research on motivation and goals from Harvard University shows how our brains work to achieve our goals. Basically it says that goals need to be very clear and our brain ignores a goal if it’s unclear about what to do. Brains act on goals only when what to do is clear. So, goals like ‘Lose weight’ or ‘Exercise more often‘ or even ‘I want to feel ok about being stuck‘ are too nebulous. They beg the question ‘how’ or ‘what do I do?’
The how to ‘If-then’ planning
When setting a goal you need to specify not only what you will do but also where and when you will do it.
If (or when) [___situation__], then I will do [___behaviour__] So a goal about losing weight, your brain would need to know much more about the ‘how’ and the ‘what’ of losing weight. An If-then statement or goal might be ‘If I get the pudding menu, then I’ll ask for coffee’.
This may sound a bit cumbersome to start with but research suggests far more goals are achieved by using ‘if-then’ planning. And the clever bit is that this builds self-talk at the same time. You do what you are telling yourself to do. The ‘if-then’ plan succeeds because the situation and the action become linked in the mind. The brain recognises the situation as an opportunity to advance the goal. When the situation is detected action is initiated automatically. “If-then’ plans become “instant habits”.
b) Build in opportunities for students to self-check their work
Monitoring checklists
Construct checklists with students itemising the important things to check before they consider something is finished. Students should use such checklists as they work through something, and again as a final check before they submit work for assessment.
How we relate to standards of excellence, quality, and correctness is key. It is about developing a sense of standards; a view of what’s good, bad or indifferent. Initially students accept what they are told by teachers about what something needs to look like, be like, feel like. But with support and encouragement students are able to begin to think for themselves about what makes something good and eventually determine their own standards.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
If/Then planning is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
4.Widen experience of self-guided activities to students.
I offer students opportunities to tackle ‘wild’ rather than ‘tame’ tasks and expect students to develop their own high level goals and success criteria.
What if we occasionally designed tasks that are ‘wild’, that have no pre-determined outcomes, that give learners free rein to explore areas of their own interest?
Begin by asking students to identify questions to which they would like to know the answer – as one school calls them, ‘big awe and wonder questions’.
Sift them so that everyone chooses from a range of questions that the class consider of greatest interest rather than allow complete freedom of choice.
Students then design and undertake their own enquiry into their preferred area of interest as a home learning project.
Not for every day AND remember that you can’t start this sort of discovery task until students are equipped with sufficient goal setting, planning and revising habits.
Here’s a classical word problem that could act as a way into Wild Tasks. Why not have one a week and let students become intrigued.
The broken egg problem.
A farmer is taking her eggs to the market when her cart hits a pothole. The cart tips over and every egg is broken. For insurance purposes she needs to know how many eggs she had. Unfortunately she doesn’t know, but remembers something from various ways she tried packing the eggs. When she put the eggs in groups of two, three, four, five and six, there was one egg left over, but when she put them in groups of seven they ended up in complete groups with no eggs left over.
What can the farmer figure out from this information about the number of eggs she had? Is there more than one answer?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
For teaching ideas at the same level, see the Perseverance module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
b) Hallbankgate Primary, a school close to the Cumbrian fells. Here’s how they structure a home learning project focused on ‘the world around me’.
Children are challenged to design independently a home learning activity that are inspired by ‘big’ awe and wonder questions about the world around them. They draft various questions before deciding which one would stretch their learning and knowledge of the wider world the most. The children then select the most appropriate ‘learning muscle’ to simultaneously stretch during their home-learning challenge. Using a planning tool, the children list the resources they will need to capitalise on: this links to the ‘Planning the job’ element of the Planning progression ladder, i.e. foreseeing possible obstacles and identifying possible solutions from the outset.
The children are fully in control of their home learning projects, communicating and sharing their plans with their family. Examples of projects include, ‘What if there was no rain?’, ‘Why is the world a sphere?’, ‘Which season was Newcastle United’s best in my lifetime?’, ‘How bad is the traffic where I live?’, ‘What if the sun went out for the day?’, ‘Can humans live on Mars?’ and ‘How can we protect endangered animals?’.
The children complete their home-learning projects in a variety of ways: some children made formal presentations of what they had discovered, some created 3D models of ‘what if…’ possibilities. Children also wrote fictional stories and made computer presentations, information booklets and surveys. Across all ages, there was a wide variety of questions posed by the children: some children were inspired by their learning in school (plastics and pollution, the changes in Britain during the industrial revolution, the changes throughout history for those who were rich and those who were poor in society, statistics in maths and space in science).
5. Enrich your offering of greater student responsibility for learning.
I offer students opportunities to experience open-ended activities, opportunities to spend longer on tasks and to decide on admissible outcomes.
In order to help learners to become increasingly independent and self-sufficient, you’ll need to design tasks that, over time, afford learners opportunities to do more for themselves as the teaching scaffold is slowly reduced.
In the early stages, tasks may be highly structured with the whole class following a path pre-determined by the teacher. As the amount of teacher direction reduces, you may still set the agenda and provide the necessary resources to answer the questions that they set, but how the questions are to be tackled is beginning to shift towards the learner – controlled enquiry. At the level of guided enquiry, you will still identify the topic / area of study, but learners decide how to tackle it. And at the level of free, independent enquiry, learners determine the area of study and how they wish to pursue it.
Ask yourself the hard questions:
Which type(s) of enquiry are evident in your classroom?
How could you begin to gradually shift task design away from Structured Enquiry and towards Free Enquiry?
Think about the oldest students in your school – which level of Enquiry might they be capable of working at? How will you plan, at whole-school level, to achieve this?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Linked ideas appear in the Capitalising/Resourcing module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
4. Practical ways to grow your practice in coaching
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
. . . they are confident, independent and interdependent learners who learn with and from each other in a community of enquiring minds. They feel they are valued contributors to the learning culture.
When we are curious we are genuinely interested in learning. Curiosity lies at the heart of coaching, hence coaches are effective listeners and ask questions to open dialogue without sounding like an interrogation. Coaching aims to enable people to see what they are doing more clearly and discover their own ways to improve. A coaching approach:
helps people to explore their challenges, problems and goals
provides an objective view of peoples actions to enable them to see things as as they really are
enhances motivation and raises self-esteem
builds curiosity and encourages learning
Above all, coaches resist offering solutions. Offering solutions does little to secure learning as the student hasn’t been allowed to confront and engage with the problem and find their way forward. Learning powered teachers adopt a coaching role.
1. Introduce a coaching approach.
I resist simply offering solutions to problems. I now ask questions which encourage students to find answers within themselves from what they have done previously. E.g. Support to continue approach
a) Talk to nudge improvement in the skill: self-recovery from ‘stuck’
Support to continue: questions not answers
If students freeze when they are stuck, offer supportive questions not answers. A basic support to continue is ‘What do you do next?’, and when this has been done ask the question again, and then again
Support to continue’ prompts are seen as helpful by students. You are encouraging them to take over the job themselves and reminding them that uncertainty shouldn’t lead to paralysis. It’s about weaning students off depending on you and activating their positive self-talk about learning.
The advantage of asking questions over telling is that you are in a better position to monitor how pupils are learning when they are doing the explaining.
b) Coaching approaches and talk
Model the visible thinking routine….What do I know? What do I need to know? What techniques do I have for bridging the gap? This helps students to develop their own internal dialogue for combating stuckness.
Encourage students to identify the cause of their stuckness. Move students from saying “I’m stuck” to ” I’m stuck because…” Naming the problem will often suggest a reasonable next step.
Ask pupils how they might check their answers or why they think they are right or wrong. Have them work with each other on this to encourage a learning community rather than just teacher-pupil dialogues. Coaches are effective listeners and ask questions to open dialogue without it sounding like an interrogation.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Support to Continue is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand coaching approaches to help students engage with different needs.
I use coaching approaches so as to stay curious about students’ needs. I help students re-frame experiences so that they draw out meaning for themselves. .e.g. What could you try? What have you tried in the past?
Coaching is basically a structured conversation where one person, the coach, helps the other person, the coachee, to find out their own answers. The coach asks questions and listens but does not offer suggestions.
The GROW structure is widely used —
set the Goal...“What is it that you want to do?”
find out the Reality…“What’s it like at the moment?”
think of Options…“What might you do to improve?”
commit to the Way forward.… “So what are you going to do and when are you going to do it?”
Give thought to when you have to tell, and when you can afford to coach. The critical factor is whether the learner has sufficient skill and understanding to find out for themselves. If they have, coaching will work and at the same time shifts responsibility towards the learner. If they do not, then a more teacher-led, mentoring or even telling approach may be called for.
b) Re-frame challenge: explore learning how to overcome a struggle
The Learning Pit: from struggle to success
Use the ‘Learning Pit’ as a means of opening up a conversation around the feelings involved when struggling with learning, and the journey to overcoming the struggle. It is essential that students know:
that the ‘pit’ is only one staging post on the learning journey
they can get out by using ‘stuck strategies’ and tools
It is also worth noting that the pit is not necessarily inevitable for all students in all learning – some will fly over the pit in some topics or curriculum areas.
The ability to cope with and overcome difficulty and challenge is a key aspect to becoming a successful learner.
James Nottingham introduced the idea of the Learning Pit as a way to explain that struggling is part of learning and that if we are to understand something we need to struggle with it first. Students move from unconsciously incompetent (an emotionally ‘safe’ area before learning), to consciously incompetent (the emotionally tricky “pit”), to consciously competent (the far side, after the learning has happened).
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
The GROW model is introduced in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
The idea of the Learning Pit is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
3. Deepen coaching approach to raise students’ curiosity.
I help students build curiosity in their own learning by raising questions to explore how learning is working. e.g. ‘Can you explain that step again?’ ‘How did you…?’ I listen in order to understand more about a student’s learning.
Learning Mat… a simple tool to encourage students to become more self-aware of how they are using a learning habit. An A3 or A4 laminated sheet kept on tables or used as part of a wall display. Shows various aspects of a learning habit.
Students:
refer to them during lessons;
use them as prompts;
use them as self-assessment tools;
use them as reflection tools;
join in meta-cognitive talk.
Teachers can use them as an audit tool to support their planning. i.e. which of the skills are implied in the lesson plan and therefore how will they be surfaced in what you draw attention to and how you orchestrate the lesson.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Learning Mats appear in all modules, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
4.Widen access to coaching to students.
I train students to give effective feedback to each other. e.g. listening to gain insight, questions to open dialogue and how to offer non-judgemental feedback to each other.
You are already a skilful coach, but the next step is to train your students to coach each other, using the same techniques that you use. Peer coaching is a beginning, but ideally you are seeking to help students, in the long term, to be able to coach themselves.
Teach your students to coach each other. Coaching is basically a structured conversation where one person, the coach, helps the other person, the coachee, to find out their own answers. The coach asks questions and listens but does not offer suggestions.
The GROW structure is widely used —
set the Goal..“What is it that you want to do?”
find out the Reality…“What’s it like at the moment?”
think of Options…“What might you do to improve?”
commit to the Way forward… “So what are you going to do and when are you going to do it?”
Try organising speed coaching between students lasting 10 minutes each way – it can be really effective.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Further ideas can be found in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
Further ideas can be found in the Listening module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
5.Enrich their fluency in different coaching styles.
I develop and adapt my coaching style, together with students, so that we can accommodate different needs. E.g. Using the skill/will matrix with coaching to: inspire; direct; guide; experiment.
Use the familiar ‘Skill: Will’ matrix to help students develop ways of reflecting on their own performance. Using the matrix (see below), students judge their levels of accomplishment and motivation in any area of the curriculum or indeed life beyond school. Students can support or coach each other to complete the grid objectively and then identify for themselves small steps to create the desired movement. Each of the quadrants requires a different coaching approach.
Direct – set short-term goals, structure learning tasks and monitor progress closely.
Inspire – re-kindle interest, set short term actions and accentuate positives.
Guide – envision the future when skill levels are raised, secure appropriate learning opportunities and provide reflective feedback.
Delegate – encourage experimentation and further challenges to maintain interest.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Further ideas can be found in the Revising module, section 2, iii) Moving from Blue to Green.
Further ideas can be found in the Listening module, section 2, iv) Moving Beyond Green.
5. Practical ways to grow your practice in modelling
Where are you now and what else might you try?
With the intended outcomes for learners that…
…they view learning as a lifelong process. They understand and relish the uncertainty of learning and are resilient in the face of difficulty. They are confident finder-outers and risk takers in pursuit of their goals.
Modelling is all the ways in which you demonstrate how you are a learner too; a confident finder outer.
It takes your students behind the scenes of learning and shares with them some of the uncertain thinking of learning.
Learning aloud is a good place to start: take students through how you would work out a problem. Modelling the thought processes (including emotional) that learners go through is important because a lot of the skill of learning only manifests itself in the inner world of the learner.
Expose the thinking, feeling and decision making of a learner-in-action to help students actually see and hear how learning works.
1. Introduce modelling the way to do a task or carry out a skill.
I use ‘learn alouds’ and take students through how to work out a problem. I make sure I explain the skill and model how to use it, review it and evaluate it.
Whatever the subject, modelling ‘how to’ is given added value when linked to the learning behaviours that make for successful performance. Take on the role of an intelligent novice and model performance at a slightly higher, more coherent and informed level than is characteristic of your students. Model your ‘think alouds’.
Try the following steps for whatever skill you are modelling;
introduce the skill e.g. how to find something in an index;
explain the skill, explaining why the information is important;
model the skill, showing how you do it;
review what you have done, ask students to tell you what you did;
reflect on the use of the skill, where else the skill can be applied.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
This is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
2. Expand modelling to use the uncertain thinking in how to tackle a problem.
I demonstrate tackling things that might appear difficult. I share my uncertainties, I offer different ways to try. I make my thinking visible and explain my feelings throughout the process.
The attitudes, values and interests that you display in the classroom, knowingly or not, constitute arguably the most powerful medium through which the messages of learning rub off on students. To encourage students to engage in the effort necessary in rising to challenge, you need to externalise your exploratory thinking; thinking through a problem out loud:
demonstrate the habit and inclinations of a good learner
What’s this problem about?
Have I seen/done one like this before?
What am I trying to achieve?
How will I know when I have achieved what I need to do?
So, how might I set about it?
talk about the challenges you have face and how you overcome them
What happens if I do xxx or yyy?
Does that work?
Why not?
What else could I try?
OK that seems to work so what’s the next step?
show that you too have to put in effort to be successful
I’ve re-done that bit a couple of times but it’s still not looking as good/sound/right as I think it should.
What else could I try?
Ahh! that’s looking/feeling/behaving better now.
I think that’s going to work
show interest in the mistakes you make
Oh! what’s happened here?
Why doesn’t that work?
That’s interesting. I’ll need to remember that for next time.
but that mistake has got me thinking about…..
At this stage modelling moves up a notch from showing how to do something correctly to explaining how you are thinking through the problem in order to get it right.
b) More ways of showing yourself as a learner
What are you modelling to your students about being a good learner? Ask yourself:
‘How much do I “learn aloud”—externalise my own exploratory thinking—in front of the students?’
‘How do I react when things do not go according to plan?’
‘To what extent do I reveal to the students the thinking that went into organising a lesson one way rather than another?’
‘How do I respond to questions I can’t answer—am I thrown by them?’
‘How much could I reveal about my own learning projects—with all their ups and downs?’
A BLP teacher’s job is as much to demonstrate the habits and inclinations of the good learner as it is to be knowledgeable and in control. Traditionally it has been the teacher’s role to demonstrate mastery of the subject, and to be able to answer any questions which the students may throw out. Teachers still tend to worry that they will lose respect from the students if they don’t ‘know their stuff’ through and through.
But the professionalism of the BLP teacher must allow them to show students what it is to be a confident ‘finder-outer’ as well as a ‘knower’.
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Modelling being stuck is introduced in the Perseverance module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
Start here for more teaching ideas.
3. Model a broader range of learning behaviours.
I model the use and value of a broader range of learning behaviours as I introduce them as useful learning strategies. e.g. Making links, Reasoning, Imagining. Planning.
Students learn much by imitating others and so will learn much from absorbing your own planning skills.
Try setting up a challenge that requires students to create a plan of action and join in the group as a learner, without taking over or leading the activity;
During the challenge try to act out some of these positive learning behaviours:
organising what needs to be done in what order – what must we do? what must we do first? second?;
deciding success criteria – how will we know if our plan is working?;
thinking about how long it will take – how long do we think this will take us?;
agreeing milestones and how the plan will be monitored – when will we stop to see how things are going?;
deciding who will be doing what – who will take the lead on this?;
looking out for possible sticking points / obstacles – what might get in the way?;
keeping an eye to ensure the emerging plan meets the original objectives – are we still on track?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
These ideas are introduced in the Planning module, sections 1 and 2.
Start here for more about Planning and how it develops.
4. Widen access to the skill of modelling to students.
I train and encourage students to model and explain their thoughts and thinking process clearly to others.
a) Enable students to describe and explain their thinking
Get into the habit of asking students to tell their partner what they are thinking and, whenever possible, to explain why they are thinking it. The role of the partner is to probe with ‘why’ type questions to move the response from description to explanation. The routine encourages students to talk about what they are thinking, thereby surfacing that which is frequently sub-conscious.
Teacher talk
Can you describe this …?
Why has it got a….?
Why does it look like that?
Why is it made of…?
b) A Visible Thinking Routine . .
sometimes used by teachers to help students to structure a short paragraph that identifies and describes a point the learner wishes to make; offers evidence to support it; and explains why they have used it.
Point
Evidence
Explain
Sum up the main idea
Provide evidence for the point you are making
Why is the quotation significant?What effect does the quotation have on the reader?Why has the writer used this technique?
•In my opinion… •Arguably… •The writer uses… •Similarly… •Both… •In contrast… •One of the language features used is…
•For example… •An example of this is… •This is shown… •This can be seen… •This is demonstrated when… •We know this because… •The evidence for this is…
•This shows… •This suggests… •This implies… •This is effective because… •The writer has chosen this technique because.. •This would make the reader feel… •This has been used because…
Teacher talk
Are you convinced?
Is the evidence convincing?
You explained that really well.
Why do you think that happened?
Why do you think this?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
Helping learners to move from Describing to Explaining is introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, i) Moving from Grey to Purple.
PEE and ‘Why do you say that?’ are introduced in the Reasoning module, section 2, ii) Moving from Purple to Blue.
5. Enrich their fluency across a range of modelling styles.
I show myself as confident finder outer, willing to own up to ignorance, uncertainty and mistakes. I have become fluent in working through the uncertain thinking of challenges in front of students.
a) Show yourself as a practising subject specialist
Your students spend much of their time watching you teach a subject… be it Maths, or Science, or History or . . . . But when do they get to see teachers being Mathematicians, or Scientists, or Historians, practising their subject specialism rather than purveying it; wrestling with it rather than effortlessly talking about it; making mistakes and working at the edge of their comfort zone rather than repeating things that were mastered long ago? Inspire your students to become mathematicians, or scientists, or historians, by finding occasions when you can model this in real time;
learn alongside students
demonstrate the attitudes of a lifelong learner
make mistakes
talk through pros and cons of various actions
work at the edge of your comfort zone.
We have come across science teachers who always have an experiment of their own on the go; English teachers who write poetry alongside their students; Artists who undertake the same activities as their classes; Mathematicians who are publicly exploring taxing problems together etc. Can you find opportunities to model yourself not as a subject teacher, but as a lifelong student of your subject?
Where to search for similar ideas to extend your practice
For more ideas about modelling yourself as a learner, read pages 80 to 83 of ‘The Learning Powered School’.
6. Exploring your journey
Take another look at the Relating chart. Now that you’ve got a better idea of what it is trying to show, have a go at:
checking, for understanding, the cells you were unsure about previously
making a better, more considered, estimate of where your practice lies now.
Remember… don’t expect your practice to be at the same level across all three green columns. The interest lies in perhaps discovering skills you haven’t noticed yourself using before, and revealing those skills you may need to grow.
‘My role, as teacher, is to evaluate the effect I have on my students.’ It is to ‘know thy impact’, it is to understand this impact, and it is to act on this knowing and understanding.
(P19-20, ‘Visible Learning for Teachers’ by John Hattie)
This section invites you to consider:
the impact that your changes have had on your teaching and on your classroom culture;
the impact that your changes have had on your learners;
what you might do next.
The story so far . . .
In section 1.4 you made a rough estimate of where your classroom culture was on the Relating for Learning chart.
In section 2.2 of this module you were invited to explore how the Relating for Learning classroom culture impacts on students’ learning behaviours.
As a result . . .
you have implemented some changes in relation to Relating for Learning.
Ask yourself:
What did I plan to do differently, and what impact was I hoping for?
What have you learned from this experiment about a) your teaching and b) your students, that you can take forward?
Asking why it did not work.
If the planned changes did not have the desired impact, why not?
What might have contributed to this?
With hindsight, what might you have done differently?
What will you do differently next time?
What have you learned from trying this idea out that you will take forward?
Asking ‘where next’?
Firstly, make sure that the successful changes that you have already made remain part of your teaching repertoire going forward. Just as it takes time to change students’ learning behaviours, it takes time and practice to translate teaching experiments into teaching habits.
Secondly, look back at section 1.4 again. Does that suggest anything you might wish to work on next?
Thirdly look at your students through the lens of the progression charts for learners (they are all in the download to the right). Which aspect of their learning development is most in need of attention? Does that help to focus what you might try next?
Fourthly – do not forget that you can keep revisiting these 4 modules (numbers 2/3/4/5) and trying out ever more learning-friendly approaches as you and your learners move forwards together.
I think we should adopt the layout we used in phase 1 v7. They are familiar with that layout so keeping the same will ease them in.
A powerful learning journey
Update this intro
Serious, worthwhile books have been written about the why, what and how of students’ need to develop their learning dispositions into profitable learning habits. Hundreds of snippets of good practical ideas have been used in thousands of schools, increasingly, across the world. Over the last five years we have managed to have a go at documenting the growth of learning power in students. This has given teachers a more day to day purpose for their efforts and added rigour to their approach. But teachers were still left to rummage about looking for appropriate ways of ‘being’ in the classroom with little sense of their own progression.
This itch of a problem led us to asking some tricky and difficult questions. What of a teacher’s development? Can a teacher build themselves into becoming a teacher of learning power? Is there a route? Do some skills come before others? Is there progression? A progression in what? Would it be possible to capture this as a trajectory?
Now, after almost 20 years of enabling and documenting teachers’ practice that is designed to build their students’ learning power, we are ready to offer our findings in a way that teachers can try out, argue about, change, and help them to clarify and make sense of their own journey as a teacher of learning power.
Finding your way through this section
This resource lays out a possible route for teachers who are seeking to become a learning power practitioner
Its purpose is to help you to;
appreciate the whole game of developing students’ learning power
analyse your current practice across four aspects of teaching
select what you need from a vast range of staged teaching ideas
make renewed headway in your practice
re-check this growth chart and re-new your teaching as and when…
Re-acquaint yourself with the Teachers’ Palette (Section1)
Get a feel for the Teachers’ Growth Charts (it’s easier than it looks!)
Estimate, roughly, where your teaching is pitched now on the chart
There’s more to it than you think. Update or ditch
Over the last 20 years of research and development in schools, TLO has offered, supported, provoked and harvested a great deal of information about classroom practice all to support the development of teaching that would build students as powerful learners.
You might well wonder why such content has merited documentation and online modules let alone any further clarification for teachers. Why can’t you just go to conferences and be inspired, read a book about it and get on with it and chat with other teachers who are giving it a go? We’ve discovered over time that:
this level of innovation in classroom culture, which in some sense is working against the grain of current ‘knowledge rich curricula’, is harder and more complicated than it appears;
schools in the past have had a tendency to think of the approach as merely a few tweaks in classroom practice, to make light of its potential and translate ‘lite’ versions of it in schools…which inevitably fizzle out;
research by Chris Watkins and others has revealed just what it takes to shift classroom cultures to become more learning friendly. This has given the search for learning power a richer, more concrete vision of how to implement it across a school;
our unique research into how learners could grow and progress as learners…what the ‘building’ bit of Building Learning Power looks like at different phases, has made the ‘how to’ aspect of the approach more purposeful. Not an approach but a way of being. All this new research has continued to add purpose and rigour.
The rich ideas now embedded into building powerful learners are far too extensive and deep to be dealt with in once in a blue moon school training days or even carefully focused online modules.
The online programmes and modules attempt to:
chop a big complex innovation into more bite size chunks for schools;
suggest which chunks are best to tackle and make sense of first;
faithfully offer the researched content in a do-able form i.e. so that schools only get the bits we know work which saves you time twiddling about with stuff that may sound good but doesn’t do the job;
couple the researched online content with professional learning team sessions in schools because these are the best ways of supporting and delivering changes in classroom practice.
And now we are adding another organising strand; that of the conscious development of teachers’ practice.
You see, there is:
no point in just knowing more stuff unless you can use it to change/improve your practice purposefully
AND
no point in changing your practice unless you know more about how it builds on what you do already, what sort of change is likely to work and where it might go next.
Together the progression in your teaching behaviours will assist students to build their learning behaviours all facilitated by the vast range of teaching ideas in the learning programmes. This combination will enable a school to build better learners right not lite, make a complex set of ideas work on a practical level, and achieve the outcomes you want for your learners efficiently and effectively.
Changing professional habits
A critical aspect of our carefully blended programmes is the school’s support for Professional Learning Teams; teams designed to turn researched ideas into practice in classrooms.
When teachers want or need to improve it actually involves them in changing their teaching habits. It’s not just about knowing new stuff, it is about doing what you do differently. That’s much harder. It involves changes to;
what you know – knowledge
what you believe – feelings or attitudes
what you can do – your skills
what you actually do – putting it all into practice
So changing how you teach is a delicate, complex process……...that’s why it’s hard!
And the hardest thing isn’t getting new ideas into teachers’ heads
It’s getting the old ones out…….that’s why it takes time and effort.
It takes time and practice to undo old habits and become graceful at new ones……that’s why these learning programmes are based on how adults learn and the researched professional development approach of teacher learning communities.
1. The teachers’ palette
The teachers’ palette of learning friendly strategies
As a teacher, you are building your student’s learning power by helping them to recognise and expand their own learning capacities. This involves the ways in which you relate to students, talk to students, organise your classroom, and design activities, as well as what you notice and celebrate about learning.
This model of classroom practice draws heavily on the work of Chris Watkins, Institute of Education, University of London, and his work on developing learning centred classrooms. These classroom features help teachers to move beyond just wishing for ‘independent learners’ or ‘active citizens’, but rather they are the design principles that lie behind learning power teaching and will help to steer the development of pedagogy.
Making learning power work involves transforming the culture of the classroom. A common language for learning is adopted; staff shift responsibility for learning to students and model learning by sharing their own difficulties, frustrations and triumphs; students come to understand themselves as growing learners and consciously improve their learning habits; teachers assume the role of learning-power coach, offering students interesting, real and challenging activities to enable them to create their own knowledge and stretch their learning habits. Underpinning this is the obvious reality that students will only change their behaviours once their teachers have changed theirs’.
The culture of the classroom is determined by how teachers are, the relationships that exist between the teacher and the learners, the ways in which the teacher talks and what the teacher talks about, the extent to which teaching is designed to ensure both content acquisition and the development of learning behaviours, and the often subliminal messages about what the teacher really thinks is important.
These 4 aspects of culture – Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating – form the basis of The Teachers’ Palette, a key model in building powerful learners.
2. Unpicking the palette
60 ways to grow your teaching! Update if we change the grid
The somewhat forbidding chart opposite has emerged from asking lots of questions and taking a serious look at each aspect of the teachers’ palette. What do the twelve aspects of the palette mean in everyday practice in ordinary classrooms? What would that look like in terms of teacher actions?’ And then ‘what might that mean in terms of teachers getting better at doing it?’ Is there a pathway or is this development just ‘suck it and see’?
Basically the chart captures what each aspect of the Teachers’ Palette can look like in practice; hence 12 columns. Instead of earnest sounding statements the chart is populated with real descriptions and examples of what teachers actually have to do. Furthermore, the descriptions have been ordered to offer a growth pattern – from traditional good teaching to the highly effective practice of a seasoned learning power practitioner. The chart might even be called The teachers’ growth chart.
The Teachers’ Growth Chart.
UPDATE if we change the grid. It just looks sooo complicated
Here we consider the three aspects of Relating for Learning – Devolving Responsibility; Coaching approaches; Modelling learning – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Just take a quick look;
Do the three green cells on the bottom row sound familiar?
What about the next line up? Do those statements reflect what you have been doing to build your students’ learning power?
What about the penultimate green row? How comfortable do you feel with those?
Here we consider the three aspects of Talking for Learning – Sharing a language of learning; Exploring learning as a process; Nudging learning forward – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Just take a quick look;
Do the three green cells on the bottom row sound familiar?
What about the next line up? Do those statements reflect what you have been doing to build your students’ learning power?
What about the penultimate green row? How comfortable do you feel with those?
Here we consider the three aspects of Constructing Learning – Reflective models of learning; Linking learning and content; Offering rich, challenging activities – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Just take a quick look;
Do the three green cells on the bottom row sound familiar?
What about the next line up? Do those statements reflect what you have been doing to build your students’ learning power?
What about the penultimate green row? How comfortable do you feel with those?
And finally we consider the three aspects of Celebrating Learning – Growing learning habits; Re-defining failure; Learning on display – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Just take a quick look;
Do the three green cells on the bottom row sound familiar?
What about the next line up? Do those statements reflect what you have been doing to build your students’ learning power?
What about the penultimate green row? How comfortable do you feel with those?
Of these 4 aspects of classroom culture – Relating; Talking; Constructing; Celebrating – which are you most comfortable with as a concept? Which least comfortable with?
We think this represents a three year journey to accomplish – do you agree?
Find out a bit more about what the chart means and how its constructed in topic 3.
3. Exploring the axes
Take a look at the what and how of jobs to be done.
Each column has a simple label such as ‘Devolving responsibility’ or ‘Linking content and process’ that denotes the job to be done. The job to be done is followed by the question ‘How can I develop students’ sense of autonomy?’ ‘How can I design dual focused learning activities to stretch students’ use of learning habits?’ The questions explore what has to be done and for what reason. In other words the orange questions uncover why you are making these changes; in order to do what; in order to achieve what? This thrust of what, how and why has helped teachers keep hold of the bigger purpose as they try out and perfect the small practical ideas on a daily basis.
Take a look at the column purposes. Are they what you thought they might be? Would you want to amend any of them? Are any vital purposes missing?
The classroom as a learning community where everyone learns from each other and become more confident as learners as a result.
Any clue how you would tackle each of these questions?
Making learning the object of conversation
The more richly children come to relate their own learning the more they see and take hold of their own role in it.
Which question sounds like the easiest to tackle?
Making learning the object of learning
The classroom becomes a place where young people learn that to struggle with a problem is ultimately satisfying and brings its own rewards.
Which question sounds a bit obscure or mysterious to you?
Making learning the object of attention
Focus is on the learning rather than performance. By concentrating on the learning the performance takes care of itself.
Which question would you feel comfortable to make a start on?
Take a look at the stages of growth pattern I think there are too many stages in this journey and there’s a better order. ‘Introduce, expand, widen, deepen’ feels better AND shorter.
4 main columns Revising, Talking, Constructing, Celebrating
Here we try to capture a sense of progression in teachers’ practice. At the foot of the column lies a description of a traditional classroom where the power and responsibility for learning lies solely with the teacher. At the top of the columns lies a brief description of a full on learning friendly, learning centred classroom.
Reading across the tops of the columns gives a clear picture of the practice teachers are ultimately aiming for. The cumulative steps in between describe the journey and how it changes in focus. In the early stages you are probably dealing with a carefully chosen but limited set of learning behaviours. Later you will add more learning behaviours to your range, increase your skill and fluency and turn your attention to helping the students use and benefit from the same ideas.
The first stage of the journey is simply to introduce the idea of learning powers. This is often limited to four major LP behaviours – perseverance, collaboration, questioning and revising. i.e. the behaviours that you were introduced to in the programme Playing the Learning Power Game
At this introductory stage, across all the columns, you are only dealing with four key behaviours. You are developing learning talk for these four. You are setting up displays with students to capture their growth in these behaviours. You are developing lessons that use and stretch these behaviours.
Expanding the ideas and the strategies
At the second stage of the journey you add more learning behaviours to the mix. It might be those that are obvious players in your subject i.e. reasoning in Maths or imagining in English or listening in MFL. This is a tricky stage because you are becoming more familiar with a wider range of behaviours and becoming more skilful in each of the columns. It’s a lengthy stage.
Deepening understanding
At this third stage progress across the board hots up. You have got many of the learning behaviours in play now and within any of the columns you are deepening the behaviours. You are more aware of students growing their habits and this is proudly displayed. You are becoming bolder in how much responsibility you are allowing students. Your lessons use a greater variety of active learning tasks and the learning language is richer and mapped with the student progression charts. In areas of assessment too students are taking an active role in assessing each other and critiquing learning.
Widen access
At this fourth stage students are being encouraged and enabled to get in on the act. Coaching isn’t just you coaching students but now includes students coaching each other. In teaching each other, students have a role in co-designing and co-delivering lessons. Students are offered far more open ended or wild tasks and enquiry based learning opportunities. There’s an emphasis on being inquisitive and devolving responsibility to learners.
Enrich and embed
The final fifth stage students are in charge of their own learning. Teachers and students are able to adapt their coaching style to fit different needs. The language of learning is familiar to everyone and even formal feedback is framed as questions rather than suggestions or answers. All lessons are designed to deal with content and stretch learning behaviours with much of the curriculum covered through enquiry based learning. In such classrooms everyone feels a valued contributor, everyone is alert to and counters unhelpful attitudes to learning and all are becoming experienced independent learners.
4. Explore your journey
I’d really love it if we work towards having just having four columns….working across 4 fronts is surely enough for any teacher.
Take a closer look at the journey charts . . .
These are the same charts that you saw in section 2 above. Here we invite you to make a first stab at estimating where your current classroom practice lies. Which cell in each column best describes where you are now? Which cells’ meaning are a mystery to you?
Don’t expect your estimate to be at the same level in each column, we don’t develop in straight lines! Your practice will be stronger in some columns than others. Become intrigued about yourself as a growing, learning powered teacher.
Here we consider the three aspects of Relating for Learning – Devolving Responsibility; Coaching approaches; Modelling learning – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Which cells best describe your current Relating classroom practice?
Are there any cells that mystify you and need to find out more about?
Here we consider the three aspects of Talking for Learning – Sharing a language of learning; Exploring learning as a process; Nudging learning forward – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Take a look;
Which cells best describe your current classroom Talking practice?
Are there any cells that you need to find out more about?
Here we consider the three aspects of Constructing Learning – Reflective models of learning; Linking learning and content; Offering rich, challenging activities – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Take a closer look;
Which cells best describe your current classroom Constructing practice?
Are there any cells that you need to find out more about?
And finally we consider the three aspects of Celebrating Learning – Growing learning habits; Re-defining failure; Learning on display – and begin to explore how each might change as the classroom becomes increasingly learning friendly.
Take a closer look;
Which cells best describe your current classroom Celebrating practice?
Are there any cells that you need to find out more about?
Of these 4 aspects of classroom culture – Relating; Talking; Constructing; Celebrating – which is currently most learner-friendly? Least learner-friendly?
Which aspects do you need further clarification about?
In which one area would you most like to initiate a change.
5. So what : Now what?
Following up on your tentative estimates
Now that you’ve made a first stab at estimating where your teaching is pitched you’ll be curious to ask about the ‘so what and now what?’ stage of your learning process. The rest of this resource is designed to clarify, expand and support your professional growth as a learning powered teacher. Find out how later sections offer more information about what teaching statements mean, give immediate practical implementation ideas and, importantly, give suggestions of where to find ideas for furthering your journey in deeper online modules that are now available to you.
So what have you found out and now what do you do about it?
You have:
gained a sense of where you feel your classroom practice sits on the teaching trajectories;
got a feel for which columns and cells of these charts are perplexing you;
you may even have decided on an aspect of classroom culture that you want to focus on.
What’s next?
The next four sections – 2) Relating, 3) Talking. 4) Constructing, 5) Celebrating – aren’t necessarily in the order that you will want tackle them. This is your Learning Journey, and you can choose how to go about it for yourself.
Each section will help you:
make links between your classroom culture and how your students respond as learners;
understand what each progression statement means in practice;
consider a couple of teaching ideas to try (some of which you may already use);
suggest where you will find similar ideas from a vast selection in learning modules now available to you.
However, we would recommend that:
you begin with Relating for Learning as changes here pave the way for changes in the other three;
you do not try to do too much at any one time – maybe tweaking just two aspects of your practice drawn from sections 2 to 5 at any one time will be enough – you cannot possibly change everything simultaneously!
you consider carefully where your students are as learners before you start to practise developing your own teaching behaviours – you really do need to
start from where they are,
NOT
from where you want to be.
The idea of how you might link teaching behaviours with learning behaviours is explored at the outset of sections 2 through 5.
And remember:
learners will only change their learning behaviours in response to teachers changing their teaching behaviours.
This section offers you a useful tool to help you consider your classroom practice followed by just four examples of what you could do to make your classroom a little more learning friendly.
The sections cover;
Become curious about your classroom practice
A key idea about how you relate to students
A key idea to extend learning talk with students
A key idea for celebrating learning
A key idea in constructing lessons
You will be introduced to many more classroom practice ideas in the online programme Playing the Learning Power Game.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘Section 4. Developing classroom practice’]
We are working hard to make our classrooms less teacher-focused and increasingly learning-friendly. Classrooms where students:
can and do take responsibility for their learning;
understand and talk about the process of learning;
rise to challenge and reflect on how they are learning;
understand how they are becoming better learners.
Of course it’s not a case of classroom cultures suddenly becoming transformed into learning-friendly ones – it is a blend of lots of small changes that slowly shifts the feel of how classrooms work. Our classrooms are not totally learning-friendly yet, but they are on the way.
So, where would you say the feel of your classroom culture would be just now? Take a look at the Poles Apart statements. Which aspects of a learning-friendly classroom are already part of your practice? Which less so? Which of these possible shifts excite you most? Worry you most?
Then, take a look at the 4 ideas that follow. They could help you to make your classroom culture just a little more learning-friendly.
We all come across blocks and obstacles, go into blind alleys, get flummoxed by a vast range of possibilities, or simply don’t know enough to decide what to do next.
Being able to get ourselves unstuck is as much about how we react emotionally as it is about having the practical strategies to work out how to overcome it. Being able to manage an effective way out of being stuck is a critical part of being a resilient learner. Here are some simple shifts in practice;
Explore with students how it feels to be stuck in learning and develop a list of suggested unsticking strategies; often know as STUCK posters
Work with students to find useful questions for them to ask themselves and helpful strategies for them to use when they are stuck. The point is to engage the students in these discussions rather than you doing it for them.
Ensure that there are plenty of options that come higher on the list than “Ask the teacher”.
Every classroom needs stuck prompts in one form or another. They could be of a general nature or made relevant to a subject or topic.
It’s important to ensure that stuck prompts ‘grow up’ through the school, reflecting the curriculum expectations. In essence they represent the level of independence expected in different year groups. Talk with colleagues and visit their classrooms for ideas.
4c. A key idea to extend learning talk with students.
Extend the language of self-monitoring and reflection
A Learning Mat is a simple tool to encourage students to become more self-aware of how they are using a learning habit. Basically, it’s an A3 or A4 laminated sheet that is kept on tables or used as part of a wall display. It shows various aspects of a learning habit. Students refer to them during lessons, using them as prompts about the finer aspects of a learning habit that is being stretched. A major strength of these mats is that they help students to be able to join in meta-cognitive talk.
Although the mats look easy enough to make, thinking up the aspects of the learning behaviour you are encouraging students to look out for has proved tricky for teachers to compose. However the learning behaviour charts, mentioned in Section 3, are full of clues to help in this task and will even help the school to create different levels of mats as students improve.
Notice that all the statements shown here are aimed towards a growth mindset. Make sure your praise matches these statements.
The negative value of too much general ability praise, uncovered by Carole Dweck in her research into Growth Mindsets, has caused teachers to think differently about giving praise. Suggested shifts in giving praise include:
Praise the effort, not the ‘ability’;
Praise the process not the outcome;
Praise in specifics of learning behaviours, not generalities;
Praise privately;
Praise authentically, and not too much;
Praise should be seen as separate from feedback
Use stickers, awards, treats etc. for accomplishing specific process or product goals.
Make sure you re-define being stuck, making mistakes and failure as learning opportunities. Put a positive spin on mistakes and give students a different way to think about them. This leads to improvement and development in both learning outcomes and students’ learning behaviours.
4e, A key idea in constructing lessons
Flip the emphasis in how goals are expressed
Evidence shows that goals that relate to doing something or researching something, or creating something . . . ) are better motivators than goals that relate to knowing something or passing / doing well in a test.
Put the ‘how’ before the ‘what’.
So – a goal relating to ‘understanding xxxxx’ or ‘knowing yyyyy’ is less likely to motivate a learner to make the effort than a goal that starts with some indication of the sort of ‘effort’ or way of doing something;
work with a partner to decide why…….
use your problem solving skills to work out……
use your imagination to ….
Where ‘knowing goals’ place the emphasis on the successful acquisition of knowledge or creates a pass/fail scenario, the ‘doing goals’ focus on how – something to do rather than something to know.
What this means is you are beginning to pay attention to how students will be learning as well as what they will be learning.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘Section 4. Developing classroom practice’]
In this section you’ll find a short introduction to an important first job as a teacher of learning power; that of finding out about your students’ current learning behaviours. This job is briefly unpacked over four sections;
3a. Put your toes in the water
3b. Reflect on what you found
3c. Get a sense of how learning behaviours progress
3d. Discover yourself as a learner
PLEASE NOTE. These section just aims to give you a flavour of what progression in learning behaviours is all about. The detail of how the school is collecting this data is outlined in section 1 of Playing the Learning Power Game programme.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘Section 3. Discover students’ learning behaviours’]
Are you aware of whether or how well your students use the valuable learning behaviours we looked at in section 2. Think of past students if you are yet to meet your new students.
To get you started just look at the statements in the resource opposite to prompt you to think about your students. Try to see your students through the lens of learning behaviours, their current strengths and shortcomings as learners. ‘How’ they learn, rather than in terms of their attainment of ‘what’ they learn.
Think of a student for each descriptor. Ask yourself:
Is it easier to think of students who possess a particular positive learning behaviour, or students who are missing the skill?
Which of the 4 domains of learning (emotional, cognitive, social, strategic) appear stronger in your students? Weaker? Why might that be?
Which domain was the hardest to complete? Does the emotional domain, for example, seem weaker than others? Is it difficult to find positive learning behaviours in, for example, the strategic domain? If ‘yes’, why might that be? What other questions do your answers raise?
On the surface the last exercise (3a.) looked to be a simple activity and should open up an interesting thought process about all your students’ learning strengths and weaknesses.
However, this simple exercise is just that – simple. You are presented with straightforward choices:
are they curious?
do they work well with others?,
do they like a challenge?
Research tells us that these learning behaviours:
are not either / or options, this is not a binary choice. Nobody does any of these things in all circumstances with consummate skill;
likewise, nobody is completely lacking in all circumstances. Learning behaviours are neither black nor white – they are a muddy mix of dispositions, skills, attitudes and habits that are acquired /cultivated progressively (or not) and are not necessarily deployed consistently across the different subjects of the curriculum.
Therefore you’ll need to think carefully about how you might go about exploring:
the learning behaviours of students in your class;
how the learning differs between different groups of learners;
how you might strengthen and cultivate better learners;
what would count as success.
3c. Get a sense of how learning behaviours progress
Being an effective learner isn’t something that switches on on good days and off on bad days; it grows and builds when it’s nurtured and supported. Furthermore, being a learning powered learner involves gaining control of a range of linked dispositions and skills and emotions.
Over the last ten years there’s been an attempt to capture the essence of that growth and make it useful for teachers and learners. Take a look at this very slimmed down progression chart alongside. Here you can see just 12 key learning behaviours...shown in the columns.
Each of the 12 learning behaviours are briefly described at one of 5 levels of proficiency shown in the rows. These levels of proficiency grow and flourish when they are cultivated by teachers and supported by families.
Download the chart and take a closer look at it. You’ve probably never considered any student in this way. Take your time just absorbing what you see. Don’t think too hard about the progression levels at this stage, but rather try to absorb the nature of the descriptions of learning behaviours across the different areas of learning.
Download as pdf [If printing this pdf, it is best done on A3 paper, landscape (in the print settings)]
3d. Discover yourself as a learner
To get a better sense of these learning behaviours and their growth think about yourself as a learner. Start slowly. Make a copy of the Learning Behaviour Charts (download opposite), and think:
where would I place myself on each of these 12 trajectories?
what do the statements really mean?
is this behaviour secure for me i.e. I do it all the time (I do do it rather than I can do it)?
have I ever thought about myself like this before?
would my partner / colleagues see me in the same way?
when you have completed all the columns the pattern becomes your current Learning Behaviour Profile. Now you can ask…
what are my learning strengths/weaknesses?
am I substantially lower or higher in some? Which?
any surprises or disappointments?
what questions is this raising for me?
[A reminder…we took a quick look at learning habit progression in section 2b.]
All schools today need to be educating not just for exam results but for lifelong learning. We know that to thrive in the twenty-first century it’s not enough to leave school with a clutch of examination certificates. Students need to have knowingly learned how to be tenacious and resourceful, imaginative and logical, self-disciplined and self-aware, collaborative and inquisitive.
‘Students throughout the world need now to reach higher levels of achievement, not only to find fulfilling work but also to empower themselves to thrive in an increasingly complex world’ – Dylan Wiliam
The capacity to learn and adapt needs to be lifelong because change is a permanent state, and the pace of change is moving evermore rapidly.
Underlying our approach is a recognition that learning how to learn involves more than skills, it involves students’ attitudes, values, interests and beliefs as well. It’s about helping students to help themselves to be disposed to persist, to question and be curious, to collaborate harmoniously and to be open to new ideas.
Have a quick think about some students.
It may be that some of the girls in your classes believe that ‘Maths isn’t for girls’ or that some students think that ‘If you can’t solve it in a minute, you can’t solve it at all’ or that ‘Bright people never have to try’. All these erroneous ideas cause students to have a tendency or be disposed to give up easily, to feel stupid, to feel disengaged. You can think of ‘dispositions’ as indicators of the degree to which one is disposed or tends to make use of a skill or knowledge.
But remember…the good thing is that these dispositions, inherent in all of us, are not fixed at birth. They can be developed by all of us regardless of ‘ability’, social background or age. Extending our learning power has no limits.
2b. Theoretical frameworks; learning, teaching and progressing
Here you will find an introduction and exploration of the, now, 3 models that underpin and steer what might be called the Learning Power Approach to learning and teaching.
Learning
The Supple Learning Mind– the key learning behaviours that were and are judged to be of the highest value in helping students to learn and thrive in a complex world. This array of learning behaviours came initially from research at Bristol University and written about extensively by Professor Guy Claxton.
This learning framework shows that learning isn’t just about having a good memory; it encompasses how we feel (emotional), how we think (cognitive), how we learn alone and with others (social), and how we manage the process (strategic), of learning. It provides a language that helps teachers to think about how they cultivate each of the learning behaviours and helps students to gain a better personalised understanding of what they have to do to learn content. Each learning domain clusters together the high value learning behaviours that best make that domain work well and each of these have a dispositional aspect. For example the social domain is made up of the learning behaviours of being ready, willing and able to be interdependent, to collaborate, to listen and empathise and to imitate.
Teaching
The Teachers’ Palette– captures the ways that teachers can: shift responsibility for learning towards students; talk about the process of learning; plan lessons that consciously develop positive learning behaviours; celebrate the growth of learning. This model of classroom practice is largely based on the research of Chris Watkins Emeritus Reader, University of London Institute of Education.
Making learning power work involves transforming the culture of the classroom. A common language for learning is adopted; staff progressively devolve responsibility for learning to students and model learning by sharing their own difficulties, frustrations and triumphs; students come to understand themselves as growing learners and consciously improve their learning habits; teachers assume the role of learning-power coach, offering students interesting, real and challenging activities to enable them to create their own knowledge and stretch their learning habits. Underpinning this is the obvious reality that students will only change their behaviours once their teachers have changed theirs’.
Progressing
The Phases of Growth is the most recent framework to be researched and become the model that helps the previous ‘brain’ and ‘palette’ models to work productively together. The need for this model grew from a realisation that the first two models were about a deep interest in getting better at learning but with little or no route map. The Phases of Growth model provides a useful route map.
The route attempts to map the stages of dispositional growth that can be applied to every learning behaviour. It borrows ideas from Bloom’s Taxonomy of Objectives of the Affective Domain to generate a condensed version of the five main phases of growth which, when translated into ‘attitudinal speak’, moves from;
Lacks. where the tendency is to react with…. ‘I can’t’ or ‘I won’t’;
Receives… ‘Show me’ or ‘tell me’;
Responds… ‘I’ll try’;
Values… ‘I see why’;
Organises… ‘I make sure’;
Embodies… ‘I can’t not’
This progression of attitudes is long term and certainly not inevitable. Phases will take some people years to work through. Some will never be worked through or achieved. There is a lifetime of development captured here. Nevertheless your role as a teacher, or indeed a parent, must surely be to encourage and enable this journey.
2c. Staff learning; online, in teams, small scale enquiries.
Changing and developing working practices is hard and delicate work and research shows it works best when teachers can access relevant information online, meet regularly in a safe professional environment to explore and plan how they could change, and later share and probe the triumphs, tribulations and outcomes of their classroom experiments.
Learning on-line
Once you’ve read through and absorbed this introductory resource you’ll be given access to the online programme Playing the Learning Power Game. This means that you’ll be able to access the content whenever you want. The school has a plan for when each Unit of the programme will be tackled together but the material will be available for a couple of years and you’ll want to return to the programme’s catalogue of ideas again and again.
Learning in a team
You will be invited to join a Professional Learning Team whose job it is to explore, implement and improve our approach to learning across the school. Teams meet together at particular points in the programme to discuss what they have read, plan what they want to try in the classroom and share and reflect on what they have tried earlier. Hence our teams support and scaffold teachers’ habit change by:
deepening teachers’ understanding of learning;
drawing on the support of colleagues;
unpacking the ‘how to’ together when it’s unclear;
planning to try out new things, considering what’s doable for their students;
benefiting from reflection on and sharing of data from their experiments with each other;
Small scale enquiries
We encourage teachers to approach changes in practice as small scale action research enquiries. This means you’ll be making a small change to your practice, and monitor the impact of this change on yourself and your learners. You develop enquiry questions in the form ‘if I do ‘x’, will students do ‘y’? – e.g. If I enable my students to develop and use Stuck Posters, will their inclination to persevere improve? Monitoring these actions and results enables the school to learn its way forward.
2d. What are the benefits?
Building your students’ learning dispositions, or powers, is not a high risk strategy as far as results are concerned. You are giving students a language with which to think about the process of learning; you’re giving them the strategies to become more engaged and more effective in their learning; you’re giving students tools to assess the growth of their learning capacities.
Learning Power provides a ‘both / and’ solution. You as a teacher boost the development of students’ confidence, capacity and appetite for learning itself, helping them to achieve as well as they can in terms of more conventional syllabus content. Students get a better preparation for life and improved examination performance—a seductive package indeed.
Wise words from key academics.
‘Dispositions to learning should be key performance indicators of the outcomes of schooling. Many teachers believe that, if achievement is enhanced, there is a ripple effect to these dispositions. However, such a belief is not defensible. Such dispositions need planned interventions.‘John Hattie.
‘We need to move from thinking about learning as a set of techniques and skills that can be ‘trained’, to a set of dispositions, interests and values that need to be ‘cultivated’.‘David Perkins.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘Section 2. The school’s approach to learning’]
The Central Belief…that learning is learnable; that the expandability of young people’s minds is much more important than any hypothetical upper limit of ‘ability’ they might possess.
The School’s Role…as a learning gym; knowing some students will be used to being stretched, while recognising that others will not have developed, as yet, their mental stamina and their tolerance for challenge. The aim must be to help all students to think of themselves as improving learners
The Teacher’s Role…as a learning power coach; watching and listening to students, stretching their learning behaviours, helping them to think of themselves and operate as improving learners.
The Student’s Role…as an increasingly independent, reflective and self-aware learner; consciously using an increasing range of learning behaviours in their everyday learning, developing a richer learning language and begining to understand themselves as a growing learner.
1b. Our approach to student learning… in a nutshell.
What we are trying to do is to put a deep, practical understanding of learning at the heart of what goes on in every classroom. It’s an approach to learning that is underpinned by the new sciences of learning and starts from first principles;
that there are several broad dispositions that we all need to develop to become successful lifelong learners
that these dispositions range across how we feel, how we think, how we work with others and how we manage the process of learning
that these dispositions are inherent in all of us. BUT
these are not fixed at birth, or when we leave school
they can be developed by everyone regardless of ‘ability’, social background, or age
that learning behaviours can be individually trained, nurtured and exercised.
When teachers work to make learners’ dispositions more positive they become far more enthusiastic about engaging knowingly with their learning. This involves helping students to become more independent, more reflective, and better able to plan and evaluate their own learning. As John Hattie’s research has shown, this is a better way of boosting students’ attainment than more drilling in the subject-matter.
We’ve tried and tested strategies you could use immediately. You’ll find four of these strategies in section 4.
Ensuring students learn how to learn.
1c. Our approach to teachers’ learning… in a nutshell.
Changing the habits of a professional lifetime involves un-learning and re-learning: unpicking, readjusting, trying things out and seeing what works. It’s about staff using their own learning power to effect changes in themselves.
The school has adopted PD approaches guided by;
knowing that building students’ learning power takes time to implement but can be made in small cumulative steps
keeping a dialogue going to ensure the change remains high-profile and moving forward
teachers’ need to experiment, reflect on, and distil their learning
the whole school needing to be involved in the same ‘game’ of learning
the need for staff to see themselves as learners and leaders of their own learning
the need, eventually, to devise and agree standards of teaching for learning power practice.
We help teachers to see that their development of students’ learning power doesn’t need a complete reorganisation of what they do. It’s often about how you phrase something a little bit. Instead of saying, ‘You need to do it like that’, you could ask, ‘Is there a better way of doing it?’ Or, ‘What do you notice when you are doing it that way?’ Same number of words; no extra effort. But you are encouraging students to be more thoughtful about their learning, and to take greater ownership.
A useful way to help orientate your thinking about our approach to learning is to take a focused walk around the school. What you’ll be looking for is how what you see on classroom walls is helping students to cultivate positive learning habits and attitudes to become better learners.
‘Culture’ is about all the little habits, routines and practices that implicitly convey ‘what we believe and value round here’.
What routines and attitudes do the classroom displays seem to convey? Ask yourself:
What does the ‘feel’ of the displays tell me about the classroom culture?
Is there a balance towards in-house displays or are they mostly commercially produced?
How do displays support independent learning by students?
Do the displays focus mostly on what has been learned, or what is being learned?
Do displays of students’ work show ‘work in progress’, and tentative, amended drafts?
Do displays help students know how to improve and make curriculum progress?
Are any of the displays helping students to know how to strengthen their learning behaviours?
Do students have a say in what should go on the classroom walls?
Do displays invite students to interact with them in some way?
What does the look and feel of classrooms inform you about how teachers relate to students, talk to students, constructactivities, and what they celebrate about learning. Take a look at the video for a short explanation of these ideas in action.
The big picture of classroom culture
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
This section focuses on how you, as a learning champion, can guide and support your professional learning team as they begin to explore Unit 4, Broadening the Range. The 3 sections below offer a range of ideas, suggestions, formats, resources for how you might:
Introduce Unit 4 to your professional learning team (PLT);
Support members of your PLT;
Lead the two Team Meetings.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
introduce and encourage teachers to branch out and play with building some of the next 8 learning behaviours, to get the feel of them in preparation for Phase 2 of the programme.
As a result it should have the following impact:
teachers will be inspired to explore two or three new learning behaviours of their choosing in anticipation of Phase 2 of the programme.
Tackling Unit 4 over two months
Unlike previous units that had a clear flow through the materials, Unit 4 is more an invitation to explore new learning behaviours of interest to the teacher.
Their first task will be for teachers to make a decision on where they want to start. They might:
look at their students’ learning profiles and target perceived areas of weakness;
focus on learning behaviours that link well with particular curriculum areas (ie Reasoning with Numeracy);
agree together to focus on the same behaviours that are considered cross-school priorities;
agree to tackle different behaviours so that all 8 new behaviours get explored;
or senior leaders / champions may suggest a behaviour to start on as it is a perceived weakness based on their observations over the past months.
The next stage is to explore 2 or 3 of these behaviours over the next two months. They should plan to explore a new behaviour every 2/3 weeks, but there is no expectation of using all the materials shown in Unit 4.
There are 2 meetings scheduled for Unit 4, about one month after the start, and a final meeting at the end of the year. Both are times when teachers will share, compare and contrast the outcomes of their experiments.
If the programme started in Sept and you have managed to stick to our suggested timings, you should aim to begin Unit 4 late in year 1, possibly around Summer half term (end May)
Strategic concerns for champions
What might champions be doing?
During the online reading stage: keep the conversation going informally, show an interest in which behaviours teachers are thinking of focusing on, and why they are choosing those ones.
Before Meeting 1: As teachers begin to trial some ideas, go into classrooms to support and encourage. Look in particular to link up teachers who are exploring the same additional learning behaviour(s).
After Meeting 1 and through to the end of Unit 4: Support teachers implementing their personal action plans derived from Meeting 1. Look out for teachers trialling similar ideas and pair them up. Share ideas that are working well.
What champions will be thinking about
What has gone well; what has gone less well; where the examples of best practice lie and how these ‘hot-spots’ can be shared more widely; what still needs consolidating; how to maintain momentum and build on these foundations.
Resources to introduce Unit 4
Here are 2 resources both designed to act as initial introductions to Unit 4 of the online programme.
The first is a short description of what teachers will need to know before they embark on Unit 4. Use this to give your team members a quick overview.
The second is a much longer presentation that could be used if your school wishes to devote time to a whole-school introduction.
Choose whichever route works best for your school.
Here’s the quick overview of Unit 4 to get teachers started.
You could simply gather your team together and talk through these aspects of Unit 4.
(There is a handout for team members at the end, plus some notes about how you might talk about the handout should you need them.)
The story so far . . .
Units 1, 2 and 3 have largely concerned themselves with exploring the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Celebrating and Constructing) through the lens of 4 key learning behaviours (Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration, and Revising).
Unit 4 begins to explore the other 8 learning behaviours that were considered in Learning Profiles, but have taken a back seat to the big 4 over the past few months.
What is Unit 4 about?
Unit 4 offers an introduction to the other 8 learning behaviours that were considered in Learning Profiles – Noticing, Making Links, Reasoning, Imagining, Capitalising, Listening, Planning and Meta Learning.
The 8 sections are ‘Toes in the Water’ sections – brief introductions to each of the 8. The aim is to begin to ‘Broaden the Range’ of behaviours addressed in classrooms.
Navigating the sections
Unlike previous Units, there is no set way to navigate these 8 sections – they can be tackled in any order, and it is unlikely that any teacher will explore more than 2 or 3 of them in the first instance.
Teams make their own decisions relating to which behaviours will be tackled, and in what order.
This is the longer, optional, presentation that provides teachers with a full overview of Unit 4.
Introducing Unit 4 content to your teachers
This short slide presentation aims to help teachers understand Unit 4 and how it builds naturally on from the work they have been doing thus far.
The slide deck could be used to introduce teachers to the key ideas behind Unit 4. In total it might take around 30 minutes to work through with your staff.
You might use this slide deck:
just as it is to introduce the ideas to staff;
to help structure a learning conversation amongst/in teams;
added to strategic presentation of your own to ensure staff gain a holistic picture.
Brief explanatory notes can be found under each slide.
This section explores how you as a champion might support your PLT members as they undertake Unit 4 and expand the range of learning behaviours that they are considering.
We offer:
a self-review tool for champions and for team members to stimulate reflection on how effectively teachers are embedding changes to their classroom culture;
a deep review tool for champions to reflect on and distil their evaluation of the progress that the school has made towards achieving the big ambition of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
A tool for both champions and team members to reflect on how effectively teachers are embedding changes to their classroom culture.
An opportunity for champions and team members to look back over the ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ programme and consider the effectiveness of the changes they have made in terms of classroom culture.
Unlike previous wheels that were by and large at the level of ‘is this happening?‘, here we invite champions and team members to reflect on the effectiveness of the changes they are making in classroom culture – the focus has become one of ‘how well is this happening?‘
The deep review tool for champions and school leaders to reflect on and distil their evaluation of the progress that the school has made towards achieving the big ambition of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
Identical in format to the Culture Review that you met in Unit 3, this tool focuses on the Big Ambition of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ and helps you to:
Consider the impacts of your interventions;
Extend your understanding of the Big Ambition;
Identify good practice;
Explore pinch points;
Identify issues for development.
The tool is organised into three profiles, the impact that the Big Ambition has had on:
Leaders and Leadership
Teachers and their Teaching
Students and their Learning
It would be a shame to invest so much time in ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ and fail to conduct an impact evaluation. Given the importance of this activity, it might be worth involving senior leaders in the discussions as the evidence is considered and evaluated.
[We anticipate that Unit 4 may well take around 2/3 months to complete – as such it will probably spill over into year 2 even if you have been able to stick to our anticipated timings for Units 1,2 and 3. Two meetings are to be scheduled, this meeting one month after starting Unit 4, and a second one about 4 weeks later.]
This meeting invites teachers to share their explorations of the 8 new learning behaviours in Unit 4.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable them to:
Look back over and discuss with colleagues the progress they have made with their personal action plans relating to Unit 3 that they devised at the previous meeting, and . . .
Share their responses to their reading in Unit 4, Broadening the range.
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on further exploration of the ideas in Unit 4.
[Schedule this meeting about 4 weeks after the previous Unit 4 meeting, towards the end of the school year. The meeting looks back over the whole programme and looks forward to what might come next.]
Teachers are invited to share their explorations of some of the 8 new learning behaviours in Unit 4, invites them to look back at their learning throughout the Playing the Learning Power Game programme, and offers a glimpse of what might come next.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable teachers to:
Discuss the progress they have made with their personal action plans for Unit 4 devised at the previous meeting, and . . .
Share responses to their reading in Unit 4, Broadening the range.
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on further exploration of the ideas in Unit 4.
This section focuses on how you, as a learning champion, can guide and support your professional learning team as they begin to explore Unit 3, Constructing Learning. The 3 sections below offer a range of ideas, suggestions, formats, resources for how you might:
Introduce Unit 3 to your professional learning team (PLT);
Support members of your PLT;
Lead the two Team Meetings.
Plus a 4th section to guide and support you in beginning to explore Unit 4, Broadening the range.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
Section 3A – alert teachers to the transition from content-only planning, through to planning that weaves together the content to be acquired, the planned activities and the learning behaviours that are being developed and grown;
Section 3B – explain how teachers might begin to integrate learning behaviours into units of work and lessons;
Section 3C – introduce teachers to descriptions of different groups/types of learning activities;
Section 3D – offer a huge number and range of teaching ideas that will help teachers to blend the 4 key learning behaviours into their curriculum planning.
As a result of working through Unit 3, teachers will:
have recognised the importance of weaving content and learning behaviours into their planning;
have explored alternative ways of planning units of work and individual lessons to include learning behaviours;
have a heightened awareness of the activities they tend to gravitate to, and an understanding of how they might broaden their repertoire;
be able to intentionally blend activities that trigger, support or extend the 4 key learning behaviours into their curriculum planning.
Tackling Unit 3 over three months
Staff will need time to;
read sections 3A, 3B and 3C. Each section presents key ideas that will be utilised when exploring section 3D.
reflect on what each section means for how the curriculum, medium term plans, individual lessons and activities are currently planned with learning in mind. A meeting is scheduled once 3A/B/C have been explored.
explore the interactive navigation grid in section 3D – it opens up a catalogue of teaching ideas, clustered around each of the 4 key learning behaviours, each with visible thinking routines to try; activities to build into lessons; suggestions for monitoring and self-monitoring of learning; plus a fully worked up lesson for each behaviour. It is a rich resource with over 100 ideas to weave into teachers’ planning.
pick out and trial several of these suggestions. They should plan to put a couple into action every couple of weeks and note the positives or negatives of making such a change.
Leaders should be aware that one of the outcomes from exploring these sections may be the need to overhaul planning frames and consider time frames for transitioning towards building learning behaviours into existing curriculum plans.
If the programme started in Sept you should aim to begin Unit 3 around February half term with the intention of completing it around Summer half term.
Strategic concerns for champions
What might champions be doing?
While teachers are at the online reading stage of sections 3A, 3B and 3C: keep the conversation going informally, show an interest in what they are reading, thinking and maybe even worrying about.
Champions will be reading sections 3A/B/C alongside teachers – these sections raise significant issues that may need to be resolved at the whole-school level.
Before Learning Team Meeting 1: As teachers begin to trial some ideas, go into classrooms to support and encourage. Look in particular for teachers who are trialling linking content with learning behaviours (sections 3A and 3B) and for teachers who are trialling the use of different task types (Section 3C ).
After Meeting 1 and through to the end of Unit 3: Support teachers implementing their personal action plans derived from Section 3D. Look out for teachers trialling similar ideas and pair them up. Share ideas that are working well.
What champions will be thinking about?
In relation to Section 3A: do we have any examples of teachers beginning to plan at the level of 3A4 and/or 3A5? (This is where teachers are beginning to link learning behaviours with content in their planning).
In relation to Section 3B: are our curriculum / lesson planning proformas fit for purpose?
In relation to Section 3C: which types of activities are usually designed, and are we seeing a wider, more imaginative range developing?
In relation to Section 3D: which VTRs, Activities and Monitoring tools appear to be having the greatest impact?
And for all 4 of these sections, how long might it take to phase in these planning ideas so that they become fully embedded? [Think in multiple months.]
Resources to introduce Unit 3
Here are 2 resources both designed to act as initial introductions to Unit 3 of the online programme.
The first is a short description of what teachers will need to know before they embark on Unit 3. Use this to give your team members a quick overview.
The second is a much longer presentation that could be used if your school wishes to devote time to a whole-school introduction.
Choose whichever route works best for your school.
Here’s the quick overview of Unit 3 to get teachers started.
You could simply gather your team together and talk through these aspects of Unit 3.
(There is a handout for team members at the end, plus some notes about how you might talk about the handout should you need them.)
What is Unit 3 about?
Unit 3 focuses on the 4th aspect of classroom culture – how teachers create schemes of work, construct lessons and design activities that build positive learning habits.
It has a focus on how teachers:
plan to weave learning behaviours and curriculum content together;
incorporate routines for thinking and learning;
design activities that promote perseverance, curiosity, collaboration, monitoring;
build in opportunities for reflection on learning.
Section 3A
Section 3A considers how learning behaviours can be woven into long term planning. It explores 5 ‘levels’ of planning, from basic ‘content-only’ planning that is little more than a list of what will be covered and when, through to planning that weaves together content, delivery, learning and activities that build fine grain learning behaviours drawn from progression trajectories.
Section 3B
Section 3B builds on Section 3a. It explores how teachers can link content, learning behaviours and tasks/activities in medium term plans and individual lesson plans.
It is about how teachers can make learning visible to learners, or as some call it, dual focussed planning.
Section 3C
Section 3C explores different types of activities and how they activate positive learning behaviours. It offers examples of different activity types and challenges teachers to broaden the repertoire of activities that they design.
Section 3D
Section 3D lies at the heart of Unit 3.
It is a treasure trove of teaching ideas to explore and build into lessons and contains over 100 Visible Thinking Routines; Activities to build into lessons; Ways of Monitoring learning behaviours; plus a fully planned lesson for each learning behaviour to illustrate how teachers might design lessons with learning in mind.
This is the longer, optional, presentation that provides teachers with a full overview of Unit 3.
This short slide presentation aims to help teachers understand Unit 3 and how it leads naturally on from the work they have been doing on Unit 2.
The slide deck could be used to introduce teachers to the key ideas behind Unit 3. In total it might take around 30 minutes to work through with your staff.
You might use this slide deck:
just as it is to introduce the ideas to staff;
to help structure a learning conversation amongst/in teams;
added to strategic presentation of your own to ensure staff gain a holistic picture.
Brief explanatory notes can be found under each slide.
This section explores how you as a champion might support your PLT members as they undertake Unit 3 and begin to blend learning behaviours into their planning.
We offer:
2 tools to stimulate discussion with team members about their progress in a) developing classroom culture and in b) building key learning behaviours;
a more sophisticated tool to encourage both learning champions and team members to reflect on the impact of Unit 3 on their curriculum planning;
a Culture Review Tool for learning champions to discuss and to distil their understanding of classroom culture and how it is developing
Supporting team members and reviewing how classroom culture is changing
2 tools to focus the discussion around a classroom observation, plus a self-review tool for champions and for team members
Classroom visit tools
The simple observation wheel that we introduced in Unit 2 may still be used to focus a conversation after a Unit 3 visit if you wish.
We offer here 2 further wheels, one that focuses exclusively on classroom culture, and a second that looks only at the 4 key learning behaviours.
Whereas the basic Unit 2 wheel contained 2 indicators for each of the 4 aspects of culture and each of the 4 key learning behaviours, here we offer 4 indicators for each to provoke deeper understanding and discussions.
You might choose to use either of these observation wheels, or both of them, depending on the focus of your classroom visit.
As a learning champion, you might care to use these 2 observation wheels to reflect on your own classroom culture and how your students are developing as perseverant, curious, collaborative and reflective learners.
Why not share your thoughts about your own classroom with other learning champions? What are the similarities? Differences? What might you be able to learn from your fellow champions?
A reflection tool for champions and for team members.
This reflection wheel invites champions and team members to reflect on where the planned curriculum expects and supports learners to utilise the 4 key learning behaviours.
The wheel encourages teachers to reflect on how their curriculum planning, learning activities and lesson design intentionally address and develop the 4 key behaviours.
You might use the wheel to stimulate a conversation, but only after champions or team members have completed Unit 3.
A Culture Review Tool for learning champions to discuss and to distil their understanding of classroom culture and how it is developing
This tool helps champions to: – Look at your school through a learning-focused lens; – Extend your understanding of the learning culture of classrooms; – Identify good practice; – Explore pinch points; – Identify issues and practice for development.
There are many ways of using the tool:
individual champions could complete it based on what they see and know about classroom culture;
a team of champions could complete it together;
champions could split themselves into 4 groups, one to focus on Relating, another on Talking etc before pooling their ideas.
Whatever the approach you decide on, it would be great if you could arrive at an agreed profile of learning culture. It will be an informative document for senior leaders to consider, and will form a useful baseline measure against which to evaluate future developments.
[We anticipate that Unit 3 may well take around 3 months to complete. Two meetings are to be scheduled, this meeting one month after starting Unit 3, and a second one about a month later. There is no ‘end of unit’ meeting, although the outcomes from Unit 3 will be explored during the first of the Unit 4 meetings.]
So far teachers have been developing their practice to ensure that their classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly. This meeting begins the process of how they can construct curriculum plans that blend content and learning behaviours.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable them to:
Look back over and discuss with colleagues the progress they have made with their personal action plans relating to Unit 2, classroom culture that they devised at the previous meeting, and . . .
Share their responses to their reading in Unit 3, sections 3A, 3B and 3C and…
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on further exploration of the ideas in 3A/B and C.
[Schedule this meeting about one month after the previous Unit 3 meeting.]
This meeting explores the activities that teachers can use to blend content and learning behaviours.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable them to:
Look back over and discuss with colleagues the progress they have made with their personal action plans relating to Unit 3, sections 3A, B and C, that they devised at the previous meeting, and . . .
Share their responses to their reading in Unit 3, section 3D.
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on further exploration of the ideas in 3D.
This section considers how you as learning champion might begin to explore Unit 4, Broadening the Range, in preparation for introducing Unit 4 to your learning team. It has sections on:
The intentions of Unit 4 and what it hopes to achieve;
How you and the team might tackle it over 3 months.
introduce and encourage teachers to branch out and play with building some of the next 8 learning behaviours, to get the feel of them in preparation for Phase 2 of the programme.
As a result it should have the following impact:
teachers will be inspired to explore two or three new learning behaviours of their choosing in anticipation of Phase 2 of the programme.
Tackling Unit 4 over two months
Unlike previous units that had a clear flow through the materials, Unit 4 is more an invitation to explore new learning behaviours of interest to the teacher.
Their first task will be for teachers to make a decision on where they want to start. They might:
look at their students’ learning profiles and target perceived areas of weakness;
focus on learning behaviours that link well with particular curriculum areas (ie Reasoning with Numeracy);
agree together to focus on the same behaviours that are considered cross-school priorities;
agree to tackle different behaviours so that all 8 new behaviours get explored;
or senior leaders may suggest a behaviour to start on as it is a perceived weakness based on their observations over the past months.
The next stage is to explore 2 or 3 of these behaviours over the next two months. They should plan to explore a new behaviour every 2/3 weeks, but there is no expectation of using all the materials shown in Unit 4.
There are 2 meetings scheduled for Unit 4, about one month after the start, and a final meeting at the end of the year. Both are times when teachers will share, compare and contrast the outcomes of their experiments.
If the programme started in Sept and you have managed to stick to our suggested timings, you should aim to begin Unit 4 late in year 1, possibly around Summer half term (end May)
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
This section focuses on how you, as a learning champion, can guide and support your professional learning team (PLT) as they begin to explore Unit 2, Classroom Cultures. The 3 sections below offer a range of ideas, suggestions, formats, resources for how you might:
Introduce Unit 2 to your professional learning team (PLT);
Support members of your PLT;
Lead the two Team Meetings in this Unit.
Plus a 4th section to guide and support you as you begin to explore Unit 3, Constructing Learning.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
explore three aspects of the Teachers’ Palette framework – Relating, Talking and Celebrating and their impact on classroom culture;
deepen understanding of the 4 key learning behaviours – Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration, Revising.
The content builds on what staff discovered about their students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1 (their learning profiles) and suggests classroom culture interventions tailored to particular levels of learner development.
As a result Unit 2 should have the following impact:
Classrooms will be well on the way to being able to cultivate learning behaviours – it’s about readying classroom culture for intentionally blending content with learning behaviours, which we tackle in Unit 3.
Tackling Unit 2 over three months
Staff will need time to;
read sections 2A, 2B and 2C to gain an overview of 3 aspects of the Teachers’ Palette – Relating, Talking and Celebrating.
consider which of these aspects of classroom culture are already in evidence in their classrooms.
explore how to begin to integrate some ideas into their everyday practice. This may take an hour or two.
The next step is to;
explore the interactive navigation grid in section 2D.
start with dark green ‘Discovering’ cells first.
select ideas they want to try based on the analysis of students’ progress in learning habits.
Over the next three months staff are expected to pick out several classroom culture ideas that will benefit their students. They should plan to put a couple into action every couple of weeks and note the positives or negatives of making such a change.
If the programme started in Sept you should aim to begin Unit 2 around October half term with the intention of moving on by around February half term.
Strategic concerns as a champion
What you might be doing…
when your team are in the online reading stage: keep the conversation going informally, show an interest in what they are reading, thinking and maybe planning
before Meeting 1: As teachers begin to trial some ideas, go into classrooms to support and encourage.
after Meeting 1 and through to the end of Unit 2: Support team members as they implement their personal action plans.
Look out for teachers trialling similar ideas and pair them up. Share ideas that are working well.
What you could be thinking about…
What do I think classroom culture was like in our school?
Can I sense a shift in classroom cultures beginning to take place?
Are there any ideas that seem worthy of everybody adopting?
Which areas of the school / teachers are ‘on fire’ and could act as beacons for others?
Are any of the teachers struggling and in need of additional support?
Resources to introduce Unit 2
Here are 2 resources both designed to act as initial introductions to Unit 2 of the online programme.
The first is a short description of what teachers will need to know before they embark on Unit 2. Use this to give your team members a quick overview.
The second is a much longer presentation that could be used if your school wishes to devote time to a whole-school introduction.
Choose whichever route works best for your school.
Here’s the quick overview of Unit 2 to get teachers started.
You could simply gather your team together and talk through these aspects of Unit 2.
(There is a handout for team members at the end, plus some notes about how you might talk about the handout should you need them.)
What is Unit 2 about?
In Unit 2 the focus is on 3 of the 4 aspects of the Palette – Relating, Talking and Celebrating.
These 3 aspects are developed further and explained in Unit 2, Sections 2A, 2B and 2C.
Section 2D lies at the heart of Unit 2. It links together:
the learning profiles teachers have created for their class in Unit 1;
the 4 foundational learning behaviours (Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration, Revising);
and these 3 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking and Celebrating).
The Teachers’ Palette for Classroom Culture
A reminder about classroom culture
Teachers may well have already seen this 3 minute YouTube clip in Unit 1 (Section 1A1), but it is worth revisiting as a reminder of what they are trying to achieve in terms of shifts in classroom culture.
Establishing a baseline impression of classroom culture.
Stimulate a discussion to get teachers thinking about their current classroom culture and how it might be different as classrooms become increasingly learning-friendly.
Here’s the longer, optional, presentation that provides teachers with a full overview of Unit 2.
Introducing Unit 2 content to your team
This 24 slide presentation aims to help teachers explore the Teachers’ Palette, the second model central to building learning powers. Three types of classroom culture are explained, explored and reflected upon, and consideration is given to strategies that make classroom cultures ‘learning friendly’.
The slide deck and associated resources could be used to speed up teacher’s understanding of classroom culture. It could take about an hour to work through them with your team.
You could use this slide deck:
just as it is to introduce the ideas;
to help structure a learning conversation amongst/in teams;
OR added to a strategic whole school presentation, often given at the very start of the programme, to ensure all staff gain a holistic picture.
Brief explanatory notes can be found under each slide. Fuller supporting resources are offered as downloads below.
The slides in the presentation cover the following key issues:
different types of classroom culture;
the Teachers’ Palette, the second key model of Learning Power;
This section explores how you as a champion might support your PLT members as they undertake Unit 2 and begin to explore how to use aspects of the approach their classroom culture. This can be a tricky part; it’s about putting concepts into action, finding out how they work and tweaking practice to improve.
To help you along we offer:
a few thoughts about conducting classroom visits and about undertaking reviews of existing practice;
a simple tool to stimulate discussion with team members about their progress in developing classroom culture and building key learning behaviours;
a more sophisticated tool for learning champions themselves to discuss together and to gather their own first impressions of classroom culture across the school.
In this and the next two sections you’ll find a range of reflection tools; some are designed to stimulate a conversation about a classroom visit, others more formal reflection pieces for champions. None are essential, and it’s up to you as champions to decide which you might find most useful. But, whichever you choose to use, please be mindful of the intention that these are tools to stimulate reflection, sometimes between a champion and a team member, and sometimes between champions themselves.
For the ones designed to support classroom visits:
always share the ‘observation wheel’ with the team member in advance of your visit;
use the wheel as a basis for the post-visit conversation;
do not expect to see all aspects in any one lesson – indeed a few things done well always trumps lots of things done superficially;
never be tempted to treat the wheel as a sort of ‘circular check list’ – you will immediately transform your developmental visit into a top-down monitoring visit.
For the review tools designed specifically for learning champions:
these are more evaluative, usually supporting champions to distil what they are seeing and thinking;
individual champions might use them as reflection pieces, or you might decide as a team which you are going to use and how you are going to proceed;
the outcomes will offer evidence of the impact of the ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ programme;
you will probably want to communicate the outcomes of these reviews to your SLT.
Supporting team members and developing a baseline measure of classroom culture.
A simple tool to focus the discussion around a classroom visit
The ‘observation wheel’ opposite considers:
on the LHS – 2 statements each about the 4 aspects of classroom culture (Relating, Talking, Celebrating and Constructing), plus
on the RHS – 2 statements each about the 4 key learning behaviours (Persevering, Questioning, Collaborating and Revising).
Use it as a basis for a discussion with a team member about a classroom visit. It will ensure that the conversation retains a focus on classroom culture and learning behaviours.
Remember that you are unlikely to see all of these aspects first hand in a single classroom visit – you will be reliant on the teacher to offer examples from other lessons to flesh out your understanding.
It is, of course, a professional courtesy that you share the observation wheel with the teacher well in advance of your visit.
You might wish to capture your agreed thoughts by colouring the wheel in: if there is plenty of evidence that something is a positive feature in the classroom, colour in most of the sector; if it is an area for development, colour in less.
Such a ‘colouring in’ tells you little on its own, but if you were to compare and contrast a number of them, you might begin to sense some patterns in terms of school-wide areas of strength and relative weakness.
A quiz for checking out learning champions’ initial perceptions of classroom culture
This is a reflection piece about classroom culture for learning champions.
Begin by thinking about your own classroom culture. How would you ‘score’ your own classroom culture against these 12 aspects of classroom culture? Where are the areas of strength? Relative weakness? Keep an eye on the statements to the right of these trajectories – your classroom culture is unlikely to be there just yet, but they do give an indication of the direction of travel.
After you have done a few classroom visits, go back to the quiz and repeat it, but this time try to capture the classroom culture that you are seeing across the school. It might well be worth pooling your own impressions with other learning champions to gain a broader, whole-school, perspective.
There is, of course, nothing stopping you from sharing the quiz itself with interested team members – how would they view their own classroom culture against these indicators?
[We anticipate that Unit 2 may well take around 3 months to complete. Two meetings are to be scheduled, this meeting one month after starting Unit 2, and a second one a month later. There is no ‘end of unit’ meeting, although the outcomes from Unit 2 will be explored during the first of the Unit 3 meetings.]
So far teachers have been developing their understanding of learning power and their students’ learning behaviours. Here they begin to create action plans for developing their practice in order to make their classrooms increasingly learning-friendly.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable them to:
Share their responses to their reading thus far in Unit 2, and…
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on their exploration of section 2D in light of what they have already learned about their students’ learning behaviours in Unit 1.
[Schedule this meeting about one month after the previous Unit 2 meeting.]
So far teachers have been developing their practice to ensure that their classroom culture becomes increasingly learning-friendly.
This meeting is positioned and designed to enable them to:
Look back over and discuss with colleagues the progress they have made with their personal action plans, relating to classroom culture, that they devised at the previous meeting, and . . .
Share their responses to their further reading in Unit 2, section 2D and…
Draw up a personal action plan for how they will take their practice forward based on further exploration of the catalogue of ideas in section 2D.
This section considers how you as learning champion might begin to explore Unit 3, Constructing Learning, in preparation for introducing Unit 3 to your learning team. It has sections on:
The intentions of Unit 3 and what it hopes to achieve;
How you and the team might tackle it over 3 months.
Section 3A – alert teachers to the transition from content-only planning, through to planning that weaves together the content to be acquired, the planned activities and the learning behaviours that are being developed and grown;
Section 3B – explain how teachers might begin to integrate learning behaviours into units of work and lessons;
Section 3C – introduce teachers to descriptions of different groups/types of learning activities;
Section 3D – offer a huge number and range of teaching ideas that will help teachers to blend the 4 key learning behaviours into their curriculum planning.
As a result of working through Unit 3, teachers will:
have recognised the importance of weaving content and learning behaviours into their planning;
have explored alternative ways of planning units of work and individual lessons to include learning behaviours;
have a heightened awareness of the activities they tend to gravitate to, and an understanding of how they might broaden their repertoire;
be able to intentionally blend activities that trigger, support or extend the 4 key learning behaviours into their curriculum planning.
Tackling Unit 3 over three months
Staff will need time to:
read sections 3A, 3B and 3C. Each section presents key ideas that will be utilised when exploring section 3D.i.e. the catalogue of teaching ideas;
reflect on what each section means for how the curriculum, medium term plans, individual lessons and activities are currently planned with learning in mind. A meeting is scheduled once 3A/B/C have been explored;
explore the interactive navigation grid in section 3D – it opens up a catalogue of teaching ideas, clustered around each of the 4 key learning behaviours, each with visible thinking routines to try; activities to build into lessons; suggestions for monitoring and self-monitoring of learning; plus a fully worked up lesson for each behaviour. It is a rich resource with over 100 ideas to weave into teachers’ planning;
pick out and trial several of these suggestions. They should plan to put a couple into action every couple of weeks and note the positives or negatives of making such a change.
You and other leaders should be aware that one of the outcomes from exploring these sections may be the need to overhaul planning frames and consider time frames for transitioning towards building learning behaviours into existing curriculum plans.
If the programme started in Sept you should aim to begin Unit 3 around February half term with the intention of completing it around Summer half term.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
This section focuses on how you, as a learning champion, can guide and support your professional learning team as they begin to undertake Unit 1, Understanding Learning and Cultures. The 3 sections below offer a range of ideas, suggestions, formats, resources for how you might:
Introduce Unit 1 to your professional learning team (PLT);
Support members of your PLT;
Lead the Team Meeting.
There’s also a 4th section to guide and support you in beginning to explore Unit 2, Classroom Cultures.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
The intentions of Unit 1 – Understanding Learning and Cultures
The intention of the first unit is to:
introduce the 3 active frameworks of Learning Power . . the Supple Learning Mind, the Progression Charts and the Teachers’ Palette.
introduce teachers to the intriguing prospect of growing and developing students’ learning habits;
offer teachers a chance to explore themselves as a learner and complete their own learning profile;
provide teachers with the tools to compile and analyse their students’ learning profiles.
As a result of working through Unit 1:
staff will have become familiar with the underlying concepts of Learning Power;
they will have gained interesting insights into themselves as a learner;
their students’ learning profiles will be giving them some of the most influential data they’ve ever had to help shape their classroom practice.
What teachers are being asked to do across two months
In tackling this first unit teachers are invited to:
Read through Sections 1A and 1B to explore the big ideas that underpin Learning Power and give them confidence in the approach;
settle down, maybe one evening, and explore their own learning habits (Section 1C);
undertake the fascinating exercise of completing a learning profile for each of their students. This could be done over a couple of weeks (Sections 1D and 1E).
We suggest teachers be given a couple of months to understand, collect and analyse this data. Their deep view of their students’ learning behaviours will henceforth influence and shape their practice.
Timeline. It’s a good idea to take a couple of months to complete this first Unit. If you are starting the programme in Sept you and your team should aim to complete the unit by the end of the first half term. (e.g. Sept to end Oct).
What needs…
Strategic concerns for champions
What might you, as a champion, need to do at this stage?
Our learning from other schools suggests you need to have:
A clear view of
the 3 guiding frameworks of the approach
the nature of the progression charts and
when these need to be completed by
Decided how the programme will be launched/introduced
The section below contains a presentation that may help.
Decided when the learning profiles need to be completed by.
Considered how you will keep a check on how the learning profiles are coming on
Decided and publicised the date of the first Professional Learning Teams meeting
Resources to introduce Unit 1
Here are 2 resources both designed to act as initial introductions to Unit 1 of the online programme.
The first is a short description of what teachers will need to know before they embark on Unit 1. Use this to give your team members a quick overview.
The second is a much longer presentation that could be used if your school wishes to devote time to a whole-school introduction.
Choose whichever route works best for your school.
Here’s the quick overview of Unit 1 to get teachers started.
You could simply gather your team together and talk through these 4 aspects of Unit 1.
(There is a handout for team members at the end, plus some notes about how you might talk about the handout should you need them.)
Describe the four aspects of learning (The supple learning mind):
The Emotional aspects of learning – Perseverance, Managing Distractions, Absorption, Noticing;
The Cognitive aspects of learning – Questioning, Making Links, Reasoning, Imagining, Capitalising;
The Social aspects of learning – Collaboration, Listening and Empathy, Interdependence, Imitation;
The Strategic aspects of learning – Planning, Revising, Distilling, Meta Learning.
Describe the four aspects of classroom culture. (The teachers’ palette)
Relating – How you relate to your learners, gradually sharing more responsibility with them;
Talking – How you talk about learning, the ways in which you explain the learning process;
Constructing – How you construct learning to build positive learning behaviours;
Celebrating – What you celebrate, recognise, praise and display.
Describe what teachers will need to do over the next couple of months:
Online learning (Reading Unit 1, sections 1A/B/C/D). Give yourself about a month to work through these 4 sections;
Learning Profiles (Unit 1, section 1E). Create learning profiles for all of the children in your class. Summarise what you have discovered about your learners;
Team Meeting (at the end of the 2 months). Meet together to share ideas, seek similarities and differences.
Describe Section 1E – ‘Finding learning characteristics’ – which invites you to turn your attention to your class and to build the current learning profile of each child.
Show some of the profiles you have created for your own class.
This is the longer, optional, presentation that provides teachers with a full overview of Unit 1.
The slide-deck and notes below are specifically concerned with Unit 1 content. They concentrate on the content and purpose of Unit 1, describe what is to be done, and explain the anticipated timings. NB. This slide-deck could take you about an hour to talk through depending on how much detail you wish to add to the suggested commentary.
You might use this slide deck:
just as it is to introduce the ideas to your team;
to help structure a learning conversation amongst/in several teams;
added to strategic presentation of your own to ensure staff gain a holistic picture.
Brief explanatory notes can be found under each slide.
The slides in the presentation cover the following key issues:
unpicking the key area and habits of a supple learning mind
a look at how these habits might grow and develop
an invite to look at their own learning behaviours
This section explores how you as a champion might support your Professional Learning Team members as they undertake Unit 1 and create learning profiles for their own classes.
Your most important job as a champion during Unit 1 is to;
chat to your team members individually or in small groups to get a feel for how they are progressing with the Unit;
offer support where needed;
make sure that the development of learning profiles isn’t being left to the last minute;
ensure that their Summary of learning profiles is completed and given to you before the PLT meetings
pick up on and support staff who are struggling to engage with the programme.
Having received the Summaries of class profiles:
ensure summaries of class profiles arrive with you a week or so before the scheduled team meeting
be on the lookout for possible trends in their students’ learning profiles.
think particularly about any differences between sub-groups (ie are the profiles of boys different from girls?), and how this might link to whole-school attainment patterns.
ask yourself what questions this data is beginning to raise for us as a school?
3. Leading the Team Meeting
Team meeting – Gaining commitment.
This section focuses on how you can best lead the learning team meeting for Unit 1. This meeting should be scheduled 2 months after teachers begin Unit 1. It summons the end of Unit 1 and the start of Unit 2.
This first Professional Learning Team meeting is positioned and designed to enable teams to:
Agree ground rules for this and all following Learning Team meetings;
Discuss people’s responses to their reading in Unit 1, section 1A, (i.e. the guiding frameworks of the approach);
Discuss their findings and reactions arising from Unit 1 sections, 1B to 1E (developing your students’ learning profiles).
NB. As this is the first such meeting the agenda below is unique in the Learning Team meeting series. Prior to this meeting, all of the data collection, analysis and summaries of learning profiles should be complete. Team members who have not reached this point will find it difficult to contribute to the meeting.
The outline agenda for this meeting is:
Agree ground rules, objectives and agenda (15 mins only for 1st meeting)
Discuss your first impressions of Unit 1, section 1A, the Warp and Weft of Learning (10 mins)
Re-cap and reflect on the online materials from Unit 1, sections 1B to 1E (20 mins)
Consider possible strategic consequences across the school (5 mins)
This section considers how you as learning champion might begin to explore Unit 2, Classroom Cultures, in preparation for introducing Unit 2 to your learning team. It has sections on:
The intentions of Unit 2 and what it hopes to achieve;
How you and the team might tackle it over 3 months.
explore three aspects of the Teachers’ Palette framework – Relating, Talking and Celebrating and their impact on classroom culture;
deepen understanding of the 4 key learning behaviours – Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration, Revising.
The content builds on what you discovered about your students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1 and suggests classroom culture interventions tailored to particular levels of learner development.
As a result it should have the following impact:
Classrooms will be well on the way to being able to cultivate learning behaviours – it is about readying classroom culture for intentionally blending content with learning behaviours, which we tackle in Unit 3.
Tackling Unit 2 over three months
You will need time to;
read sections 2A, 2B and 2C to gain an overview of 3 aspects of the Teachers’ Palette – Relating, Talking and Celebrating.
consider which of these aspects of classroom culture are already in evidence in your classroom.
explore how to begin to integrate some ideas into your everyday practice. This may take an hour or two.
The next step is to;
explore the interactive navigation grid in section 2D.
start with dark green ‘Discovering’ cells first.
select ideas you want to try based on the analysis of students’ progress in learning habits.
Over the next three months staff are expected to pick out several classroom culture ideas that will benefit their students. They should plan to put a couple into action every couple of weeks and note the positives or negatives of making such a change.
As a learning champion you will be exploring Unit 2 while your team members are working on Unit 1.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
This section aims to give you a good grounding in the content and style of the programme itself…Playing the Learning Power Game. It first covers its overall ambition and then investigates the essential what, why and how of each Unit of the programme.
The 3 sections below:
Section 1 explores the big picture of the programme; its big ambition, its four stages and the three groups of people involved;
Section 2 offers an overview of the contents of the four Units of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’;
Section 3 guides Learning Champions in how to make a start on your own learning journey and highlights the 3 ‘must-do’ tasks as the school prepares for a whole-school launch.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
Before writing any online programme we have always needed to explain its big picture to ourselves; what it’s about, who is involved, doing what and what the outcomes are expected to be. Without such a summary of this big ambition none of our programmes would have been possible.
The chart alongside shows the big ambition for the Playing the Learning Power Game programme. Casting an eye over it will give you a clear overall sense of the programme and how it works.
Playing the Learning Power Game is an on-line programme that aims to help teachers discover their students’ learning behaviours and, with that knowledge, enable them to fashion their classroom culture and teaching methodologies to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
The Big Ambition of Playing the Learning Power Game.
This chart shows the big ambition of the programme. It distils what it’s all about.
the cells in yellow capture what leaders/champions, teachers, and learners will need to do in relation to each row:
tracking the growth of learning behaviours. Unit 1;
adapting classroom cultures to strengthen 4 key learning behaviours. Unit 2;
adapting how the curriculum is delivered in order to build 4 key learning behaviours. Unit 3;
experimenting with and expanding the number of learning behaviours consciously being used by students. Unit 4;
the blueboxes capture the outcomes such changes could make to classrooms; cultures and curriculum delivery;
the greenboxes capture the anticipated outcomes for people; leaders, teachers and learners.
The vertical axis to the left shows the 4 main aims of the programme. These four components involve:
Unit 1. The formative work of finding out about students’ learning behaviours and their potential to improve/grow;
Unit 2. The practical work of shifting classroom cultures to better accommodate learning behaviours, using 4 foundational learning behaviours to get teachers started;
Unit 3. The practical work of purposefully blending the use of learning behaviours into lesson design, again focusing on just four foundational behaviours;
Unit 4. The work of gradually bringing more of the original researched learning behaviours into play in order to build students’ use of them over time. This is in preparation for the Phase 2 programme.
The horizontal axis across the top shows the 3 main groups of players in the game and what they will need to do to make it all work. [Note that the first column, Senior Leaders, includes Learning Champions].
The central 12 cells
These cells serve 2 purposes. Firstly:
The text in each cell gives an indication of who needs to do what, in very broad terms, at each stage of this journey;
When looked at vertically down the page, they map out the 4 stages of this first part of the learning power journey;
When looked at horizontally across the page, they show the players in the game and how what they do needs to interact.
The cells to the bottom and to the right
The green cells across the bottom give an outline of how the school’s players will have developed by the time teachers have finished this first stage programme. The blue cells to the far right give an indication of the anticipated outcomes for each part of the journey from; discovering students learning behaviours, to shifts in classroom cultures, to early shifts in lesson design accommodating learning behaviours, and to the beginning of consciously using a much broader range of learning behaviours across the curriculum.
2. How the programme is organised.
Units and sections…
Each unit deals with a key aspect of understanding and growing learning power.
Unit 1. Understanding Learning and Cultures. This unit has sections covering:
The warp and the weft, foundational ideas of learning power; the basic ‘must-knows’;
Finding Learning Power, the ‘must dos’ of collecting evidence about students’ learning behaviours.
Unit 2.Classroom cultures. This unit has sections covering:
Aspects of a learning friendly classroom culture;
An easy to access catalogue of practical ideas designed to help teachers shift their classroom culture to support the growth of the foundational four learning behaviours.
Unit 3.Constructing learning. This unit has four sections covering:
The big picture of curriculum planning;
Designing units and lessons;
Activity design to stimulate learning habits;
A catalogue of learning activities are displayed in an easy to access grid framework. The point is to blend some of these ideas into the curriculum and lessons.
Unit 4. Broadening the range. Here teachers are encouraged to spread their wings and begin to add some of another eight learning behaviours to the mix. This unit has eight sections covering:
Noticing, Making links, Imagining, Reasoning, Capitalising, Listening, Planning, Meta-learning.
This development will help prepare teachers to move on to a deeper Phase 2 of the programme.
Strengthening classroom cultures to build students’ use of learning behaviours
The content of each unit and section of the programme
Unit 1, Section 1A. The warp and weft of learning
Here teachers will find:
a whistle stop tour of the frameworks that shape the development of students’ dispositional learning powers;
an overview of the classroom culture framework (the teachers’ palette) that shapes building learning behaviours;
an overview of the supple learning mind framework that identifies the learning behaviours and how they fit together.
Timing. We suggest teachers spend an hour or so in the first week exploring these big shaping ideas of Learning Power.
Unit 1, Sections 1B/C/D/E. Finding Learning Power
Here teachers will find:
an exploration of why learning behaviours are so important for 21st century learners;
information about progression in learning behaviours, what ‘getting better’ at learning looks like;
the opportunity to reflect on their own learning behaviours and those of 2 students teachers know well;
guidance to support teachers in producing and analysing their students’ learning profiles.
Timing. We would suggest teachers spend a couple of months collecting and understanding this data. Their view of their students’ learning behaviours will henceforth influence and shape their practice. If their programme started at the beginning of an educational year teachers should aim to complete this unit by the end of the first half term. (e.g. Sept to end Oct)
A catalogue of practical ideas to create a learning friendly classroom culture
Here teachers will find 3 short sections with explorations of:
Section 2A – Relating for Learning, how they might enable students to take greater responsibility for their own learning;
Section 2B – Talking for Learning, how they might enable students to understand and talk about the process of learning;
Section 2C – Celebrating Learning, how they might organise classrooms to celebrate learning over performance.
Plus – Section 2D has a practical four by four framework organised around:
four foundational, really important, learning behaviours at
four levels of growth, with
practical packages of ideas, across
three aspects of classroom cultures.
This four-by-four framework is presented in a simple grid format, illustrated here.
We’ve done the sorting for you. All teachers have to do is select what they need!
Timing. We suggest teachers spend 2 or 3 months exploring this catalogue. So for example if teachers started the programme in September teachers should be ready to move on from Unit 2 by mid-February.
Unit 3. Constructing learning
Here teachers will find:
Section 3A – The big picture of curriculum planning…planning that integrates progression in content with progression in learning behaviours;
Section 3B – Designing units and lessons…the fundamentals of lesson design;
Section 3C – Activity design to stimulate learning habits…suggesting a hierarchy of activity types, going from ‘Listening’, through to ‘Discovery’.
Section 3D has a practical four by four framework organised around:
the four foundational learning habits;
four categories of learning activities;
and with over 100 ideas to try.
This four-by-four framework is presented in a simple grid, illustrated here.
Timing. We suggest teachers spend at least 2 or 3 months exploring this catalogue of lesson ideas. So, if teachers started this programme at the start of the educational year in Sept. and teachers kept to our suggested timing for earlier units, teachers should be ready to move on from Unit 3 by mid May.
Unit 4. Broadening the range
This unit offers teachers an opportunity to spread their wings and begin to work across another 8 of the learning behaviours.
It has 8 small sections, each based on one learning behaviour – Noticing; Making links; Reasoning; Imagining; Capitalising; Listening; Planning, Meta Learning.
Here teachers will find:
A staged way of introducing the behaviours by;
Firstly… making students aware of the use and importance of a habit…when, where, why, how they could be using it
Then... exploring the learning habit a little more through its language
Try... using the behaviour as a lesson starter to tune students into using it
Then start... blending the behaviour into the way teachers teach content. Use specific strategies to deepen content understanding.
Ensure… students reflect on the success or otherwise of their new frame of mind as a result of consciously using the behaviour.
The content of this section encourages teachers to play with introducing more learning behaviours.
Timing. We would suggest teachers spend a couple of months exploring this Unit. If the school started this programme at the start of a school year and teachers have kept with the times suggested for previous units, teachers could be using these ideas in the last couple of months of the summer term, readying themselves to begin the deeper learning power journey in Phase 2 of the Programme.
3. A guide to how Learning Champions will make a start.
An overview
As you may well be aware, Learning Champions make a start 3 months before the rest of the school. This gives Champions the time and opportunity to:
understand their role as Learning Champion;
undertake Unit 1 themselves so that they develop first-hand experience of it before the whole-school launch;
prepare for the whole-school launch.
These are the 3 ‘must-do’ tasks of the first 3 months.
There is no need for champions to rush through all of the other units of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ because champions will always be working one unit ahead of the rest of the school as the programme rolls out.
That said, champions have full access to all of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ and can explore it at their leisure if they wish.
3a. Task #1. Reading a section of this module – Understanding your role as Learning Champion.
The role of learning champion is explored in depth in the section ‘Understanding the Role of the Learning Champion’. This is essential reading if you are going to make a good job of leading your team.
There are 3 sections covering similar issues but at increasingly deeper levels:
Section 1 takes a quick look at the essentials. a) what your role is all about. b) the main features of the school’s new approach to learning. c) what your conditions for action will be;
Section 2 takes a deeper look at how blended learning and learning teams work;
Section 3 looks at some of the finer points of running a team and improving development.
Take your time, read the sections one at a time, at your leisure, and discuss your reading with fellow champions.
Make a start on this now – it should not be left towards the end of the 3 month Getting Started phase!
3b. Task #2. Making a start on Unit 1 of Playing the Learning Power Game – Understanding Learning and Cultures.
The intentions of Unit 1 – Understanding Learning and Cultures
The intention of the first unit is to:
introduce the 3 active frameworks of Learning Power . . the Supple Learning Mind, the Progression Charts and the Teachers’ Palette.
introduce you to the intriguing prospect of growing and developing students’ learning habits;
offer you a chance to explore yourself as a learner and complete your own learning profile;
provide you with the tools to compile and analyse your students’ learning profiles.
As a result of working through Unit 1:
champions will have become familiar with the underlying concepts of Learning Power;
you will have gained interesting insights into yourself as a learner;
your students’ learning profiles will be giving you some of the most influential data you’ve ever had to help shape your classroom practice.
What champions are being asked to do
In tackling this first unit champions are invited to:
Read through Sections 1A and 1B to explore the big ideas that underpin Learning Power and give yourself confidence in the approach;
settle down, maybe one evening, and explore your own learning habits (Section 1C);
undertake the fascinating exercise of completing a learning profile for each of your students. This could be done over a couple of weeks (Sections 1D and 1E).
We suggest you may need a couple of months to understand, collect and analyse this data. Your deep view of their students’ learning behaviours will henceforth influence and shape your practice.
Timeline. It’s a good idea to use the first couple of months to complete this Unit. Getting on with it early will give you time to discuss what you are finding with other champions.
3c. Task #3. Preparing for the whole-school launch
The pre-launch tasks . .
Champions must read the section in this module called ‘Supporting Unit 1: Understanding Learning and Cultures’. It alerts champions to what they will be doing while teachers are making a start. No need to read this now, but make sure to have a look at it well before the whole-school launch;
Consult senior leaders to find out:
how they envisage the launch – will one of them lead it, or will you be leading it with your team?
how the professional learning teams will be formed – who will do it, when?
Some thoughts on the composition of Professional Learning Teams
There are few hard and fast rules in relation to this, but we would urge you to take the following into account:
If TAs are to be involved, it makes no sense to have them in a different team from their base teacher;
It is best to create teams with a good balance of experience; age range taught; openness to change etc;
Resist any temptation to go for ‘easy’ solutions like ‘let’s work in our existing year teams’.
Time spent considering the composition of teams now will pay dividends later!
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
Your role of a Learning Champion is to take a leading part in developing the school’s approach to learning. This section offers you, as a newly appointed learning champion, the essential background information about the role itself and the approach to learning that the school wishes to pursue. The aim of this section is to enable you to take on this new role with confidence.
There are 3 sections covering similar issues but at deeper levels:
Section 1 takes a quick look at the essentials. a) what your role is all about. b) the main features of the school’s new approach to learning. c) what your conditions for action will be;
Section 2 takes a deeper look at how blended learning and learning teams work;
Section 3 looks at some of the finer points of running a team and improving development.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘The Role of the Learning Champion’]
Your role as a learning champion is to engage with and learn from a blended learning programme with other learning champions, in preparation for…helping other teachers take part in that programme and develop their teaching to ensure students become better learners.
This section considers essential information about:
1a what the role of a learning champion is about;
1b what the new approach to learning is about;
1c finding out what the conditions of ‘play’ will be.
This section takes a quick look at the basic components of the role of a learning champion.
1. Join a team of champions to change your practice.
Your first role as a Learning Champion will be to begin:
working your way through the first couple of Units of the online programme;
meet with other champions, as a learning team, to discuss the content, plan learning enquiries and
begin to try these out in your classroom.
These trailblazing experiences will help you to support other staff when they begin the programme at a later date; usually a term later.
2. Lead a team of teachers to help them change their practice.
After about a term of learning and experimenting the next stage is for you, as a learning champion, to use the valuable experience you’ve gained and begin leading a team of teachers on the same journey you began earlier. Effectively what you are trying to do here is to help teachers to change their working practices; it’s hard and delicate work. Research shows it works best when teachers can meet in a safe professional environment to explore and plan how they could change, and later share and probe the triumphs, tribulations and outcomes of the classroom experiments. Research into teacher learning communities by Dylan Wiliam, of Assessment for Learning (AfL) fame, describes such teams as:
a small group of teachers who meet together regularly
to deepen their understanding of an approach,
to commit to trying out new things,
to reflect on and share their experiments with each other.
1b. The Job...managing a development programme
Playing the Learning Power Game is a programme, with on-line content, that aims to help teachers discover their students’ learning behaviours and, with that knowledge, enable them to fashion their classroom culture and teaching methodologies to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
1. The first aspect of the programme are the online units. These provide the content for introducing the Learning Power approach into classrooms. Different facets and levels of the approach are grouped into digestible pieces (sections) to help teachers take them on board.
2. The second aspect of the programme couples the online content with the PD approach of Professional Learning Team sessions, also known as Teacher Learning Communities. These offer the best way of supporting and delivering changes in teachers’ classroom practice.
3. The third aspect of the programme is a learning enquiry element where teachers try out, monitor and evaluate ideas found in the online course. Such enquiries ensure teachers progress their own learning in a spirit of discovery and adventure.
All three components are blended together into a learning programme that is infused with a coaching approach to learning.
1b The Job…to help develop better learners
Building Learning Power—BLP for short—is about schools focusing on preparing young people for an uncertain future and being able to thrive in the twenty- first century. It’s not enough to leave school with a clutch of examination certificates, they need now to have learnt how to be tenacious and resourceful, imaginative and logical, self-disciplined and self-aware, collaborative and inquisitive as learners.
The what of learning
Learning is an interesting process going on in student’s brains, but when we all believed that ‘intelligence’ was fixed at birth there seemed little point in trying to cultivate it. Now we know just how learnable learning is we are realising that there’s a place for developing how we learn. The Supple Learning Mind framework was conceived and researched by Professor Guy Claxton. It captures the key psychological characteristics that are judged to be of the highest value in helping students to learn and thrive in a complex world. These behaviours or powers can shape, for example, the growth of our resilience in learning, our learning relationships, how we use our thinking skills and how we manage our learning process.
The how of teaching
Teachers are influential habit formers. The way they orchestrate and guide learning influences the ways in which students perform and behave. Hence teachers need to be mindful of how they help students to form, replace, re-form and strengthen their learning habits. The approach encourages teachers to think about:
What to give away: how they might transfer responsibility for learning to students, offering them more control.
What to say: how they might use a language that helps students understand and talk about learning as a process, enabling them to take more control of their own learning.
What to do every day: the kind of classroom routines and activities that will nurture more independent learners.
Things to display: the look and feel of the classroom, its walls and reward systems, that can serve to strengthen students’ learning.
Strengthening classroom cultures to build students’ use of learning behaviours
1c. The conditions of play
Questions you’ll need answers for
The prospect and potential of taking on such a development programme will inevitably raise all manner of critically important questions for senior leaders. A range of such questions are carefully considered in the leaders’ resource Leading Playing the Learning Power Game including:
how will the school benefit from undertaking this programme?
what impact will it have on students?
what sort of time and effort will staff need to make?
what changes to the school’s operations will need to be accommodated?
But it is questions to do with school operations that will be of practical interest to you as a learning champion.
In this case, senior managers will need to have asked:
How will we prevent Playing the Learning Power Game becoming a workload issue for teachers, support staff, the programme lead, and champions?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for ongoing engagement with the online learning aspects of the programme?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for the 7 programme related meetings?
It will be useful for you to make a list of your own questions about the role you are taking on. Being given straight answers will then make the undertaking so much easier.
Here’s a link to some discussion and suggested answers that may be useful.
2a. The components of the blended learning programme explained.
2b. How learning teams work. (A long but important read)
This section explores how champions support the cycle of blended activity throughout the programme and orchestrate learning team agendas to ensure success.
2a. A closer look at the components of the blended learning programme.
The programme has a big job to do.
Building the learning habits of students means amending / changing / growing / adapting your teaching habits. It’s not just about you knowing new stuff, or buffing up on content knowledge, it is about doing what you do, as a teacher, differently. That’s much harder and will involve changes to;
what you know – knowledge about learning
what you believe – feelings or attitudes about learning and schooling
what you can do – your skills in enabling learning
what you actually do – putting it all into practice
So changing how you teach is a delicate, complex process……...that’s why it’s hard! And the hardest thing isn’t getting new ideas into your head. It’s about getting the old ones out…….that’s why it takes time and effort!
It takes time, practice and support to undo old habits and become graceful at new ones……that’s why this blended learning programme is based on how adults learn, researched classroom approaches, an adaptation of the well-known professional development approach – Teacher Learning Communities- infused with enquiry methods and coaching approaches to learning.
Online content: when and how
Reading, thinking, preparing.
Access to material. All educational staff are given access to the online content of the programme. This means they can access it whenever they wish, choosing their own time and place to become familiar with the content. Furthermore the content will remain accessible for a couple of years.
Approaching the material. When you approach ‘Playing the Learning Power Game.’ it might be useful just to read through a whole Unit fairly rapidly to get a flow of the content. At the beginning of each Unit there’s a short piece which outlines:
the intentions of the Unit;
the best way of tackling the Unit;
suggested timing for team meetings;
the expected impact of the Unit.
Time and effort. While staff can access the whole course whenever they wish concentrating on an agreed section over an agreed period of time avoids overload and helps the school to move together. In the first place any one Unit is likely to take teachers a good hour to read but they return to it again and again to digest the ideas, relate them to their classroom practice and then consider which ideas might best fit their students.
Learning alone, anytime.
Learning communities: when and how
Evaluating, discussing, planning.
Professional Learning Teams (our term for TLCs) are an essential built-in feature of this blended learning programme. Research recommends that teams of 6 to 8 teachers are formed and enabled to meet regularly for the duration of the whole journey. Such meetings are the key-stone that holds the rhythm of the blended learning programme together.
Meetings would usually last about 75 minutes during which teachers consider their reaction to the course content, plan how they might use this in their teaching and, share and analyse their classroom enquiries.
We leave the school to organise the exact calendar rhythm of the programme with the following components;
Unit 1. 2 months to complete the learning profiles. 1 Team meeting
Unit 2. 3 months to read about, plan and try out in classrooms. 2 Team meetings
Unit 3. 3 months to absorb the ideas and try out in classrooms. 2 Team meetings
Unit 4. 2 months to read and try things out in classrooms. 2 Team meetings
This iterative process continues to deepen teachers’ understanding and practice of developing their students’ learning power. It’s an exciting long term process.
Learning together in learning communities
Classroom enquiries: when and how
Researching the action you are taking is the process that quietly underlies the whole learning programme. It may first be triggered by content in ‘Playing the Learning Power Game causing teachers to;
Consider how things are now
Envisage how you want things to be
Teachers take these issues, ideas, desires with them to the Professional Learning Team session(s) where they;
Construct an enquiry question and
discuss and write an Action Plan
In their classrooms teachers then;
Take action to follow their plan and do things differently and
Monitor their actions and students’ responses – collect data, record and interpret data
At the next team meeting teachers;
Share and reflect on their actions and the impact with others and learn together
Plan to reframe their action in an Action Plan that takes account of new ideas from the course
As teachers work through many iterations of the cycle they refine their practice to become learning power practitioners.
Learning on the job, in classrooms, with students.
2b. How to ensure learning teams work
This section is a long essential read so best left to when you have 30 mins to yourself.
It follows the typical agenda items of a learning team meeting, offering hints and tips to ensure success.
This section focuses on some of the important bits of running a team meeting. Although the issues here may not be of immediate concern it’s something you might like to come back to as you ease into your role as a team leader.
When Professional Learning Teams are well established they can work perfectly happily without a leader. But in the early stages of forming a learning team the leader, or facilitator, needs to set the scene, the expectations, the ground rules, and the emotional climate.
Because you will have had a head start by working with other learning champions your next role will be to act as a PLT facilitator when the programme gets underway for all staff . Now is the time you can steer novice teams in the right direction, putting the learning from these early months of getting a feel for learning teams into operation.
3b. The facilitator’s role
There’s no blueprint for a facilitator’s job description but basically it is to guide the team through the sessions, making sure the agenda is covered, keeping team members emotionally engaged and cognitively stretched. But how the role is accomplished can mean make or break for individual, team and school success.
Being a successful facilitator involves:
being interested in developing your own practice;
believing that continuous change is the new normal;
believing in the principles of the learning power approach that is being embedded into everyday classroom practice;
having an interest in how adults learn;
being open, with an inquisitive nature;
having experienced a coaching approach.
When you do take on the facilitation role, don’t assume any “extra” expertise. You too are a ‘learner of learning power’ so you don’t want to hold yourself above your peers or feel pressured to act like you know more than they do.
3c. Make sure the important bits are covered
In the blended learning programme teachers are required to practise learning power techniques in their classrooms. With this kind of between-meeting effort teachers can gain progressively more skill and insight from how the meetings are structured and led.
Agenda item 2…How’s it going: reflecting on practice.
Research has shown that this agenda item is the KEY to making new practice take hold in classrooms and schools. Requiring teachers to reflect on the details of recent practice and outcomes in their own classrooms and ask for feedback and help on their most recent experiences is the key to success.
Agenda item 4…Personal action planning.
Before teachers begin to plan out their next steps it’s a good idea to make time for teachers to do a brief ‘think aloud’ with a colleague before committing the plan to paper. This writing down of a statement of what they will do in the coming month serves as a significant impetus in actually doing it.
It’s important to give more in-depth attention to these two supportive activities in agenda items 2 and 4. Your main job isn’t the coverage of the ‘how to’ material but to support changes in practice and all the uncertainty this involves.
When you find many teachers arriving with questions or problems about the specifics of their practice—a hallmark of the reflective practitioner – you’ll know the learning community is becoming successful.
3d. Developing teacher-as-researcher projects
Fostering students’ learning power is grounded in the reality of schools and classrooms: in what busy teachers find possible, practical, and interesting to try out. This blended learning programme encourages teachers to see themselves as research partners, who are learning through enquiry, to adopt a different teaching approach. As researchers into their own practice they will want to record their experiments as small action research projects, to questions like;
‘What was I trying to achieve?’
‘What was I trying to improve upon?’
‘What did I actually do?’
‘What effects did I observe?’
‘What did I learn that I can take forward and try to develop even further?’.
Such projects produce what’s been called ‘research with a small r’. These have more effect on changing the practice of teachers than more formal kinds of research.
3e. Where to start: scoping the territory
Small-scale, classroom based, action research projects often begin with an itch of dissatisfaction on the part of the teacher. For example, the itch that ‘my students are always asking me for help‘. Since teachers know their learners well, they may decide between one or more of the ideas for building resilience:
If I introduce the ‘learning pit’ or
If I expect them to explain why they are stuck or
If I experiment with each child having one (and only one) ‘question’ per lesson
will their inclination to seek support reduce?
This is the teacher intentionally changing their practice to discover how it impacts on learner behaviours. It’s where they consider:
how things are now;
which learning behaviour they want to change / improve;
envisage how they want things to be;
how they will know if they have been successful?
Constructing an enquiry question and making a plan was covered in section 2 above
3f. Probing questions: supporting accountability
As you all begin to adjust your practice, you are risking both disorder and less-than-accomplished performance on the part of your students and yourselves. Being a member of a community of teacher-learners, engaged together in a change process, provides the support you all need to take such risks.
It’s important to check that plans are being put into action; that people have time to carry them through and collect the evidence. Over time, as the team absorbs the values and systems the role of facilitation becomes more diffused. Everyone takes on those characteristics; there’s a feeling of shared responsibility to each other and the team. The learning culture of the team moves to a greater shared responsibility for learning.
Questions to encourage deeper thinking include:
What do you think is getting in the way?
What would make this better?
How could this technique be modified to make it work for you?
What do you think made that work so well?’
What new mistakes did you make?
What did you learn from them?
3g. Classroom enquiries: looking for results
It’s important to keep in mind the whole purpose of why the school and its teachers are doing all this. Basically it’s to benefit students by building, strengthening, improving their learning habits, in order to improve their real life chances and enable them to contribute more effectively to society. So the sort of results being considered here are about how students are changing as learners; are they becoming more aware of themselves as learners; are they improving their disposition to question, to change their minds, to work productively with others and to keep going when the going gets tough?
Even in the six – eight months of this first phase of the programme teachers have reported improved attitudes to learning. For example students;
Are better focused on their learning strengths and areas for development. NOT comparing themselves to the “golden” students who attains the highest scores.
Take control of their learning – identifying ways they can help themselves without relying on adult support.
Take risks and reflect on the tasks presented rather than charging in and just wanting to finish first.
Set their own targets and identify their own success criteria for learning. The children are better at personalising them to their own needs.
Push up their level of challenge and then persevere rather than “playing safe.”
Have greater respect for all learning habits. Understand what others can offer them rather than it being dominated by attainment perception.
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section
[You are currently in ‘The Role of the Learning Champion’]
Section 4. Inside ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘.
In this section we give you a flavour of the content of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’. This programme is expected to take a school about a year to work through but many of the resources are rich enough to be useful and returned to year after year.
The programme is made up of four units;
Unit 1 introduces learning journey charts for 12 behaviours and invites teachers to translate charts into learning profiles for their students.
Unit 2 concentrates on the culture of the classroom and how small tweaks in teachers’ behaviours can benefit students’ learning behaviours. The emphasis is on just four learning behaviours; perseverance, questioning, collaboration and revising.
Unit 3 purposefully explores how the curriculum itself provides the need for specific learning behaviours to be used and how this then shapes lesson planning.
Unit 4 begins to branch out to a further eight learning behaviours offering a staged way of introducing them to students.
You are now in section 4. Inside ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
This on-line programme aims to help you to discover your students’ learning behaviours and, with that knowledge, enable you to fashion your classroom culture and teaching methodology to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
The big ambition of Phase 1.
This chart shows the big ambition of the programme. It distils what it’s all about.
the cells in yellow capture what leaders, teachers and learners will need to do across each row:
tracking the growth of learning behaviours;
adapting classroom cultures to strengthen 4 key learning behaviours;
adapting how the curriculum is delivered in order to build 4 key learning behaviours;
experimenting with and expanding the number of learning behaviours consciously being used by students;
the blueboxes capture the outcomes such changes could make to classrooms; cultures and curriculum delivery.
the greenboxes capture the anticipated outcomes for people; leaders, teachers and learners.
The vertical axis to the left shows the 4 main aims or thrusts of the programme. These four components involve:
Unit 1. The formative work of finding out about your students’ learning behaviours and how they have the potential to improve/grow;
Unit 2. The practical work of shifting classroom culture to better accommodate learning behaviours, using 4 foundational learning behaviours to get you started;
Unit 3. The practical work of purposefully blending the use of learning behaviours into lesson design, again focusing on just four foundational behaviours;
Unit 4. The work of gradually bringing more of the original researched learning behaviours into play in order to build students’ use of them over time. This is in preparation for the Phase 2 programme.
The horizontal axis across the top shows the 3 main groups of players in the game and what they will need to do to make it all work.
The central 12 cells
These cells serve 2 purposes. Firstly:
The text in each cell gives an indication of who needs to do what, in very broad terms, at each stage of this journey;
When looked at vertically down the page, they map out the 4 stages of this first part of the learning power journey;
When looked at horizontally across the page, they show the players in the game and how what they do needs to interact.
The cells to the bottom and to the right
The green cells across the bottom give an outline of how the school’s players will have developed by the time you have finished this first stage programme. The blue cells to the far right give an indication of the anticipated outcomes for each part of the journey from; discovering students learning behaviours, to shifts in classroom cultures, to early shifts in lesson design accommodating learning behaviours, and to the beginning of consciously using a much broader range of learning behaviours across the curriculum.
About Unit 1
Three basic frameworks
The early sections of Unit 1 offer a swift and illustrated read about how the learning power approach has been researched over time and its now three foundational models or frameworks…the learning behaviours (the warp of learning, shown as a brain diagram), the teaching behaviours that ensure their use (the weft of learning, shown here as a palette) and the phases of progression which add intent and purpose to every students’ journey (shown in charts)
Developing students’ Learning Power could be seen as the warp and weft of learning, a tapestry of activities on the part of both teachers and learners. The warp of Learning Power is made up of the learning behaviours you want students to develop. These are developed and woven together by the weft of all the different methods that a teacher has at their disposal. In recent years this development journey has moved from being a broad outline to one with identifiable progression stages. This means that the language teachers use; the explicit attention they pay to the ‘how’ of learning; the activities they make available, and how these are framed for students are now positively designed to enable students to progress in the development of their learning habits. Teachers are enabled to look at their own students through the progression charts of learning power and use these to focus how they build the learning behaviours.
Unit 1 gives teachers opportunities and encouragement to;
discover and understand what ‘good learners’ tend to be like
take a look at themselves through a learning behaviour lens
tentatively consider the learning behaviours of a couple of students
remind themselves of how learning behaviours progress
In getting to grips with the growth of learning power teachers take a personal look at themselves as a learner and the learning behaviours they tend to use. This self-analysis results in a learning profile showing their learning strengths and the behaviours they find tricky and would like to improve. This sets the stage for teachers to begin profiling their students before moving on to Unit 2. Discovering and recording this data is likely to take a couple of months.
The 2 original frameworks…the learning brain and the teachers’ palette
Now given purposeful progression routes.
About Unit 2. Classroom culture
The second unit takes a look at the culture of the classroom and enables teachers to try out a range of ideas that have been found to work well in improving learners’ disposition to learning. It is expected staff will spend about 3 months working on this, but they are likely to keep returning to it over time.
Developing three aspects of classroom culture
In Unit 2 teachers are enabled to explore their work through three aspects of the Teachers’ Palette framework – Relating to, Talking about and Celebrating learning behaviours. They then go on to trying out and using a range of teaching ideas linked to the 4 key learning behaviours – Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration and Revising.
We start with these four behaviours because with Perseverance teachers find that it’s this disposition to keep going, to remain engaged, to relish challenge and strive for goals that’s most lacking in many students. Questioning because this is the driver of learning; wanting to know why, how, if, when and so forth connects us with learning. Collaboration because ‘working together’ is a familiar classroom activity and yet few students know how best to learn profitably together.Revising because learning is a process and like any process it needs managing and adapting to work really well. This foundational set of four offer the soil in which other dispositions can take root more easily.
The content builds on what teachers have discovered about their students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1 and offers interventions tailored to particular levels of learner development across the four learning behaviours. The suggested changes in practice include;
enabling students to take increasing responsibility for their own development. i.e. students asking more of the questions, monitoring their own learning or making more choices
moving away from ‘telling’ whenever possible and adopting the role of coach
showing yourself as a learner by modelling your thought process and displaying uncertainty
encouraging students to pay attention to how they are learning, to slow down and notice steps they are using
finding ways to notice and celebrate learning behaviour growth
showing how… mistakes can become learning opportunities; difficulty is when learning happens; struggle is to be expected; asking questions shows curiosity not a lack of intelligence; effort not just talent is what leads to success
displaying the process of learning by showing first attempts, revisions, failed lines of enquiry. What you choose to display tells students a lot about what you truly believe: displaying/praising only the finished article suggests that whatever we might say, we are more interested in the outcome than in the process.
These ideas and more are offered as a catalogue of teaching ideas, clustered into the 4 foundational learning behaviours (the columns) and differentiated by the phases of learner development (the rows). This builds on what teachers discovered about their students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1. Now their interventions can be tailored to particular levels of learner development.
Here teachers will consult their class profile, consider which of the four learning behaviours need most encouragement and begin to edge these into the culture of their classroom.
Here’s just one example of the sort of practical ideas teachers will find in the catalogue. It’s an idea to help perseverance (and questioning) edge from Purple to Blue stage (from ‘Show me’ or ‘tell me’ to ‘I’ll try’) in the learning chart.
Make students aware of how they will be learning
Share learning behaviours with students
Some primary schools have found it useful and effective to share an overview plan of a couple of learning behaviours that they will be using during a week. Here the information is captured on a large poster which remains on the classroom wall throughout the week.
The teacher tends to share an overview of learningfor the week … decimals … poems … ball skills and then explores which learning behaviours willreally help with this content. If the class is not at this level of discussion theteacher provides brief explanations of the behaviours.
The bottom box on the poster captures theresult of a class/group discussion of howthe habits had been used and what students hadfound out to take forward in using them next time.
About Unit 3. Constructing Learning
Taking a deeper look at learning
This Unit is possibly the one many teachers need most. It helps them to answer the question ‘how can I introduce questioning into my lessons?’ or ‘what does a learning powered lesson look like?’ or ‘how does all this fit together across the curriculum?’ It is expected staff will initially spend about 3 months working on this, but they are likely to keep returning to harvest ideas from this unit over time.
Unit 3 concentrates on the focal point in the Teachers’ Palette framework, Constructing,where classroom culture meets curriculum culture. What can teachers do with a given curriculum to ensure it is ‘taught’ or perhaps ‘learned’ in a way that will enhance and strengthen students’ learning behaviours? It’s about direct teaching, curriculum design and planning lessons. It’s about looking at the curriculum in general and thinking about how to infuse learning behaviours into it. It’s about thinking and planning schemes of work or day to day lessons to ensure students consciously use and improve their learning behaviours. It’s about how teachers handle the day to day, hour by hour stuff that enables students to understand themselves as learners. It’s about making learning power come alive across the curriculum.
Section 3A considers the transition from content-only planning through to curriculum planning that integrates progression in content with progression in learning behaviours. This aspect of the programme is of particular interest to senior managers.
Section 3B considers how teachers might plan a unit of work and then just one lesson to ensure learning behaviours are firmly embedded. In fact without the use of learning behaviours the plan would be unsuccessful. It looks at the stages of filling in blank unit plans. It looks at possible must haves and top tips for planning a worthwhile lesson. Teachers will find all sorts of tips, formats and examples to get them going.
Section 3C explores different types of learning activities and the learning behaviours that they stimulate. Activities come in all shapes and sizes – some are highly structured by the teacher others encourage learners to engage in independent enquiry.
Section 3D. Here teachers will find a unique catalogue of activities to explore. It has over 100 ideas that they might blend into their lesson designs. These ideas are organised into 4 categories for each of the 4 foundational learning behaviours. The 4 categories are:
Visible Thinking Routines – to activate each of these learning behaviours;
Classroom Activities – to strengthen each of these learning behaviours;
Monitoring Strategies – for checking how each of these learning behaviours are developing;
Exemplar Lessons – A lesson plan that integrates each of the four learning behaviours into a complete lesson.
It’s a must-have pick and mix. Expect staff to come back to it frequently.
Putting ideas into practice… a Visible Thinking Routine
This VTR helps students to reflect on how and why their thinking/understanding is changing.
Remind students of the topic you have been working on. Ask them to respond to each of the sentence stems: I used to think…, Now, I think…
Alternatively ask students to write down their views at the beginning of a topic. Invite them to revisit & update their answer during and at the end in light of what has been learned.
Or, at the beginning of a lesson ask students to write down what they understand by a particular term that will be explored in the coming lesson (e.g. Phrase (English); Proof (Maths); Power (Science) etc). At the end of the lesson, ask them to write down what they now understand by the term.
About Unit 4. Broadening the range
This unit offers teachers an opportunity to spread their wings and begin to work across the other eight learning behaviours. It has eight small sections, each based on one learning behaviour – Noticing; Making Links; Reasoning; Imagining; Capitalising; Listening; Planning; Meta Learning.
For each of the eight behaviours teachers are offered example activities for a staged way of introducing the behaviour by:
Firstly… making students aware of the use and importance of a habit…when, where, why, how they could be using it;
Then... exploring the learning habit a little more through its language;
Try... using the behaviour as a lesson starter to tune students into using it;
Then start... blending the behaviour into the way teachers teach content, using specific strategies to deepen content understanding;
Ensure… students reflect on the success or otherwise of their new frame of mind as a result of consciously using the behaviour.
The content of this section encourages teachers to play with introducing more learning behaviours.
This Unit offers an effective preparation for Phase 2.
You are now in section 4. Inside ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
Taking the programme on board will inevitably raise some vital leadership questions:
From
how will the school benefit from this programme?
To
what changes to the school’s operations will need to be accommodated?
To help structure these management issues we’ve adapted the successful McKinsey 7-S Change Management Model to help schools plan and implement organisational change.
In the section below we simply alert you to theleadership considerations that, when answered, will lay the foundations of your success.
It’s worth taking a few minutes to reflect on these 7 leadership aspects and how they might apply to your school. Sorting out the answers will lay the foundations of success.
Further help is at hand. Over the years we have learned that it’s the leadership and management of development programmes that has the greatest influence on their success. Hence, as part of the programme, we offer detailed consideration of the 7 leadership aspects in the separate leadership resource. This outlines, and suggests some answers to all of the leadership considerations necessary for the successful implementation of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
Just raising, not answering, the vital leadership questions.
1. How does this programme fit with our school values?
Having met an outline of the programme earlier the first questions you will want to muse on are:
How does ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ fit with our school’s ethos?
Will this programme strengthen our values and organisation?
How will we ensure stakeholders buy in to it?
Shared values govern any school’s health and when implementing change the expectation is often that teachers will change or adapt their teaching behaviours. As research has made clear this is only possible where there’s a change culture and real, lived school values. Taking on the values of building learning power is about preparing students for a lifetime of learning; to enable students to get better at learning; to empower them to lead a productive lifetime of learning. When considering all the questions below, they should all be seen to fit with your school’s values. Shared values is not so much a place to start but the one that will have a guiding influence over all your other questions.
2. What sort of skills/competencies does the programme enhance?
Having thought about how the programme fits with school values your next questions may well revolve around staff and learner competencies, wondering how you can gauge what your classroom cultures and students’ learning behaviours are really like now?
You may want to muse on:
What are our students’ learning behaviours like now?
What are our classroom cultures like now?
Of course the programme helps you both ask and answer such questions but here are a couple of short questionnaires to point you in a realistic direction to kick start your thinking.
3. How could we accommodate the staff development approaches suggested?
If you’ve mused on the skills and competencies that the programme will enhance you might then wonder how you go about enhancing staff skills. There are staff development approaches embedded in the programme so you may want to consider:
Could we manage the suggested staff development?
What’s the best way to organise the development of staff across the school?
How will we achieve high levels of engagement with the programme?
The way that the school decides to organise staff to engage with the programme and learn together impacts on how the programme will be led, who will lead it, and how it will be resourced in terms of directed time. As such, this is a decision that will inform many aspects of the strategy.
4. How do we prevent it becoming a workload issue?
Of course the school has all sort of instructions for how staff need to go about completing certain tasks and processes to ensure all runs smoothly. However, when thinking about changing your school’s systems, it’s sometimes necessary to assess the different types of project management and workflows which are currently in place. You might want to ask yourself:
How will we prevent the programme becoming a workload issue for teachers, support staff, the programme lead, and senior leaders?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for ongoing engagement with the online learning aspects of the programme?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for the programme related meetings?
The programme requires participants to engage with the online materials, plan and implement small scale learning enquiries, and reflect on the impact of developments with colleagues. So teacher workload and a consideration of directed time will be pertinent. You cannot will the ends without willing the means.
5. Who will lead it and what accountability may be needed?
Clear chains of command avoid chaos & confusion and the school will have a simple structure because it creates a sense of accountability within the school. But in taking on the programme you may like to consider:
Who will lead this change strategy and what accountability may be needed in the system?
How will the programme leader keep senior leaders informed of developments?
How will senior leaders support the programme leader?
Might the programme be managed by a seasoned T&L specialist, someone outside the current leadership team, would we need several learning champions, will we need a written job description….and so on. Remember – it is a false economy to invest in the programme itself but neglect making adequate provision for its leadership.
6. How are we going to support the programme?
Leadership and Management behaviour patterns
The school will have its own leadership / management styles and indeed it is this style that often decides the level of staff productivity and satisfaction in an organisation. Hence you will have been wondering:
How will we, as leaders, create the conditions where teachers are encouraged to take risks, to try things out, to fail in safety?
How will leaders demonstrate an ongoing interest in the enquiries that teachers are undertaking?
[Here, ‘leaders’ includes members of the senior leadership team and the programme lead (if not an SLT member).]
Flawless execution of tried and tested teaching routines is at odds with a programme that intentionally seeks to help teachers to adjust their classroom practice to focus more explicitly on growing students’ learning behaviours. Supporting innovation will involve dialogue and enabling of exploration. ‘Permission to act’ needs to be devolved to teachers and leaders will need to show interest in ‘learning enquiries’.
7. How do we expect it all to work? How will we create a plan to pull all this together?
The purpose and organisation of the change
The programme is a strategy and will have a place in the school’s plan to implement change and so gain improved outcomes for students. A well-crafted strategy will draw together the answers from the other six questions dealt with above. You may find yourself musing on:
What is our strategy for implementing ‘Playing the Learning Power Game?
Is the plan sufficiently detailed to show time frames, responsibilities of key players, monitoring checkpoints, contingencies, funding/time implications?
It would be wise to consider how your plan will inform your Self Evaluation form – describe what you are Intending to achieve and how you plan to Implement it. The Impact of these plans will be evidenced by ongoing monitoring as the programme develops over the next year or so.
About Section 2. Launching and sustaining the journey
Of course you’ll be intrigued by many of the ‘learning power’ ideas but putting the ideas securely into practice in every classroom is an exciting yet challenging job needing leadership support throughout.
To ensure the success of the programme we can offer a range of unique pick and mix support packages for leaders and learning champions. You can shape your own support package to ensure it will be just right for your school and its budget. The support package will assist you with;
introducing the approach to staff (see section 1 below)
sustaining the smooth running of the whole endeavour (see section 2 below)
These two aspects of the support packages for Phase 1 of the programme are outlined below. It’s up to you to pick and mix them to suit your needs.
All the following support packages are conducted via Zoom sessions at times to suit schools.
To ensure your programme makes a solid start we offer four different flavours of making a start.
A. Launching the programme yourself (DIY)
The DIY offer has resources you could use to introduce the programme to staff and others e.g. governors. There are slide decks, resource booklets and activities designed to enable you to put your own introductory training together for the programme as a whole and later for each unit of the programme. These resources don’t just amount to simple show and tell sessions – they are designed to provoke deep thinking about each aspect of the programme: the aims; learning and how it grows; the culture of the classroom; the design of lessons.
There are 5 slide decks:
Introducing ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ i.e. the whole programme
Introducing each of Units 1, 2, 3 and 4 in Phase 1
Each has a pack of resources containing;
a slide deck with notes
further explanatory / commentary notes
activities to deepen thinking
B Launching the programme via Zoom
If you don’t feel comfortable enough to introduce the programme yourself you can request our assistance via Zoom training. The most popular time for such Zoom sessions has been weekdays after school. Talk with us about what’s convenient for your school.
The ‘Zoom introductory training” pack consists of:
two 75 mins Zoom sessions, two weeks apart
2 online pre-session preparation packs, sent to each participant a week before each event, containing:
short pre-session introductory film, quizzes and activities to try;
a resource booklet to download and print;
the session timetable and its activities;
two post session 1 tasks to be completed before session 2;
an overview of the programme staff are about to embark on.
During these two sessions staff will come to understand their own students as learners and be ready to start on Playing the Learning Power Game, Unit 2.
C. Managing the programme via Learning Champions
Getting something new going evenly and consistently and particularly across a large school can be tricky. To overcome this many larger primary schools and secondary schools often prefer to spread the load of managing the programme. This can done by identifying a group of staff, who we’ll call ‘Learning Champions’, who learn together by working their way through part of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ programme before using their experience to involve all the staff. Thereafter they manage the Professional Learning Team sessions. This package includes a separate on-line resource especially for ‘Learning Champions’.
Learning Champions:
need a 3 month lead time to become familiar with ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ and the opportunity to iron out any practical problems. i.e. they start at least 3 months before the rest of the school;
create practical experience of the approach within the school which can act as a ‘go to’ resource for other staff;
offer senior leaders a significant group of teachers ready, willing and able to support, encourage and guide others;
can use the same slides as the DIY package to enable them to introduce the approach to staff.
D. Launching the programme with an in-school training day
Alternatively you might want to assign one of your 5 training days to launch the programme with staff. Such days at the beginning of terms are in very short supply and early booking would be essential. This in-school training day is designed to introduce staff to how students’ learning behaviours develop, how knowing that will influence the idea of learning friendly classrooms and their role as the teacher.
The four hour morning session knits together research based inputs with interactive analytical activities. These serve to encourage staff to consider their own teaching style, its impact in the classroom and what they might do to change this for the benefit of learning behaviours. From the start staff are encouraged to contribute their own learning habits to ensure the session is a rich learning opportunity for everyone.
The two hour afternoon session is reserved for the leadership team. Discussion concentrates on their role of supporting and managing the development of students’ learning characters, how this might affect classroom culture and curriculum design.
Each member of staff will use a richly illustrated resource book which will act as a reference text for months to come.
2. Support to keep things going smoothly
The programme can be optionally augmented by further live virtual consultancy sessions, typically scheduled to last 75–90 minutes, and with associated resources. All the following support packages will be conducted via Zoom sessions at times to suit schools.
1.Keeping it on track (leaders)
How it works.
This support package consists of three 75 minute Zoom sessionsfor leaders spread through the first year. These are scheduled to coincide with key Phase 1 milestones namely…
after the first couple of months when staff have completed their students’ learning profiles (e.g.start Nov), to ponder/discuss student profiles and what they reveal.
three months later when teachers have had time to make shifts in their classroom culture and are about to start applying the ideas to curriculum/lesson plans (e.g. start March), to discuss progress in classroom culture.
three or four months later when staff are exploring more learning behaviours and preparing for phase two of the programme (e.g. start June), to discuss lesson design and steps to prepare for Phase 2.
Possible subjects include;
Managing our expectations
Highlights and concerns
Changing the focus of classroom observation
What are we learning from looking for learning?
Engaging parents with Learning Power
Tools to remind you of what you are looking for.
2. How’s it going? (teachers)
How it works
The emphasis of this support package is on teachers monitoring their own development. It consists of three 75 minute Zoom sessions for a group of about 8-10 teachers spread across the year. These can be scheduled to coincide with key Phase 1 milestones…
when staff have completed their students’ learning profiles.
when teachers have had time to make shifts in their classroom culture.
when staff are exploring more learning behaviours in preparation for phase two of the programme.
Possible subjects include;
What have we learned from students’ learning profiles?
Tools and techniques for observing learning power in lessons;
Designing lessons to enhance learning powers
Self-monitoring tools
3. Learning Champion support.
How it works
The Learning Champion route is aimed at larger schools. It’s important that this team itself feels supported and stretched. To enable this we have prepared a specialised on-line resource for the start of their journey; this is part of the package. Thereafter as Champions begin to lead learning teams across the school it’s important that support for them continues.
Possible subjects include;
Learning Champion support consists of five 75 minute Zoom conversations across 4 terms covering;
Becoming a team and the job to be done (an introduction to the programme and their role)
Overcoming difficulties of drawing up student learning profiles (after a couple of months)
Lessons from becoming and developing as a team (things to take forward as they begin to lead other teams)
Keeping track and celebrating progress (things to be aware of or watch out for as teams progress)
Where to next? (an introduction to Phase 2 of the programme)
3. Dedicated leadership resources
Leading...Playing the Learning Power Game is a dedicated on-line resource that aims to support the leadership throughout the programme.
It is designed to offer you, as senior leaders, a view of the strategic concerns that will arise when the school takes on a whole school programme to develop powerful learners. It offers questions, think pieces, frameworks, slide decks, diagrams and monitoring tools to help leaders:
feel reassured about the purpose, benefits and frameworks of learning power;
explore important leadership roles when taking on the development of Learning Power through the school;
introduce units of the programme to staff;
maintain a secure momentum into the future;
understand ways forward beyond the initial stage;
monitor the progress and value of the whole enterprise.
Every school starting the programme will receive the Leading… Playing the Learning Power Game resource. This will be customised to the specific variety of launch package the school has selected to meet their needs.
The ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ programme isn’t like the everyday courses that explore a new idea in teaching phonics or maths. It’s a whole school programme, for all your educational staff, that looks afresh at learning itself; from the perspective of both the learner and the teacher.
Its aim is to enable teachers to learn and work together in the shared endeavour of building their students’ lifelong learning behaviours.
This is no easy task. It isn’t simply a matter of staff reading and absorbing the online ideas, trying a couple out, seeing what happens and wondering whether it worked. It’s a longer, slower, more particular process that is:
guided by research into learning;
built around a practical learning growth framework;
works hard to support collaborative learning for staff.
It offers a timely big ambition of enabling your students to become better lifelong learners.
Explore the big ideas that have shaped the what and how of the programme below and see more detail on the content of phase 1 of the programme in Section 4.
You are now in section 1 Overview of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ programme.
‘Playing the Learning Power Game’… is a blended learning programme that aims to help teachers discover their students’ learning behaviours and, with that knowledge, to fashion their classroom culture and teaching methodologies to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
A bit of history and a breakthrough
It’s hard to help students become better learners unless you have a view of what the process, rather than the outcome, of good learning looks like. Research identified the highest value psychological characteristics for helping students to learn and those characteristics aren’t fixed at birth but can be developed by everyone regardless of ‘ability’, social background or age.
The whole point of Building Learning Power is to do just that, to build these learning behaviours, not simply to name and talk about them now and again. In the early days of BLP there were plenty of classroom ideas but little sense of what the journeys of building students’ emotional, cognitive, social and strategic learning habits might actually look like. But now, by linking learning power to Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain of learning we have a distilled trajectory of the learning dispositions. This development makes sense of a learning journey that teachers can actively shape, secure and celebrate, over time.
From a vague outline of a journey
To progression trajectories for 12 learning behaviours
2. Supports collaborative learning for staff
While the online programme provides teachers with the research and classroom ideas that work, we are conscious that the ideas alone can’t bring about change in classrooms. There’s a long road between teachers ‘knowing’, teachers ‘doing’ and teachers ‘doing things differently’ which the programme is designed to support.
Changing teachers’ working practices is known to be hard and delicate work and they need support to ensure these ideas take root in classrooms. While we can’t insist schools use any particular staff development practice our suggestions are heavily influenced by the EEF’s Effective Professional Development guidance report.
The programme is a careful blend of:
online learning units….available at anytime, faithfully present researched content, designed to manage cognitive load and encourage the use of prior knowledge;
professional learning team sessions ……strategically placed throughout the programme, with a carefully structured agenda to ensure social support, with prompts for setting and agreeing goals and a forum for affirming and reinforcing progress;
trying things out in classrooms……following their agreed plans and monitoring their actions because “learning by doing” is integral to the development of expertise and expertise needs ample opportunities for practice, reflection, and adjustment.
This trio of learning opportunities work together to help teachers replace long-standing habituated practices with more effective ones. Such learning opportunities might also be reinforced by other staff development formats such as coaching partnerships to provide yet more practical social and technical support.
A combination of online content learning, learning with and from colleagues, and learning from small scale enquiries in classrooms.
3. Playing the Learning Power Game…a tight and focused start.
The ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ phase of the programme introduces the holistic ideas of learning power and helps teachers adapt their classroom culture and lesson design in order to grow positive learning dispositions.
In Unit 1 of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ teachers become familiar with the 2 models of learning power – the learning behaviours we are seeking to develop (shown as a ‘brain’, sometimes called the Supple Learning Mind); and the classroom culture that supports the growth of these learning behaviours (shown as the Teachers’ Palette).
It concludes with teachers undertaking the fascinating exercise of drawing up a learning profile for each of their students. The chart alongside is made up of the 12 most notable learning behaviours (columns) each describing in simple detail the stages of their growth (rows). When completed these learning profiles offer teachers some of the most influential data they’ve ever had to help them shape their classroom practice. The aim now is for teachers to enable their students to become more positive, adventurous and effective learners.
Unit 1. An introduction to the two Learning Power frameworks and creating students’ learning profiles.
To enable these dispositions to flourish Unit 2 of Playing the Learning Power Game explores three aspects of classroom culture: how teachers relate to students to support learning; how teachers talk to students to enable learning and how teachers celebrate learning to nurture students’ learning power.
To begin with a tight focus, Unit 2 (and Unit 3) explore classroom culture through the lens of 4 key learning behaviours – Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration, and Revising.
The Unit has a rich catalogue of classroom culture activities tailored to the particular levels of learner development. This means teachers can match their interventions more carefully to the needs of their students and realise the magic that comes from seeing their students getting better at learning. It’s students’ learning profiles that guide teachers in designing their classroom culture. We recommend you spend about three months on this Unit.
Unit 3 is possibly the one most teachers need. It helps them answer the question ‘how do I put a learning powered lesson together?’ or ‘how can I put a lesson together that focuses on, for example, questioning?’ It contains an interactive catalogue of teaching activities to shape lessons or units of work. It’s a treasure trove that can be returned to again and again. We recommend you spend about three months on this Unit.
Unit 4 encourages teachers to branch out and play with a couple of the next 8 behaviours shown in their student’s learning profiles. This will give teachers a feel for using other learning behaviours in preparation for Phase 2 of the programme. There should be a couple of months left at the end of the year for this Unit.
“Instead of simply dishing out more good advice to students-as-consumers, classrooms are becoming places of day-by-day knowledge generation about learning”.
When you are ready to move on…
4. Phase 2… deepens and broadens the impact.
Having worked on introducing students to the foundational four learning behaviours, The ‘Professional Learning Power Game‘ Phase 2 encourages teachers to extend their classroom practice to work with a further 8 learning behaviours. Each Unit offers more extensive descriptions of the behaviours themselves together with a rich bank of activities. The phase looks to marry curriculum design and the development of more sophisticated learning behaviours.
Four important features of Phase 2:
1. It builds on data about students’ learning characteristics. You begin to see and record your students’ growth;
2. The materials in Phase 2 move beyond the experimental stage helping teachers to broaden and improve their skills. It offers a profile for teachers’ development so enabling them to manage their own development;
3. It is infinitely flexible and the school chooses its own route. The 12 learning behaviour modules can be considered in any order, by anyone, to meet the needs of the school. You can go as fast or a slowly as you want but to help you engage deeply the online material will remain available to you for at least two years;
4. It is deeper, wider and even more fascinating than Phase 1. Of the 13 units, 4 will deepen the four behaviours already introduced in Phase 1, the other 8 units will deepen the learning powers that were not considered in Phase 1. A further unit offers tools to review and evaluate progress in terms of classroom culture and student learning behaviours.
To strengthen staff learning each Unit has a Professional Learning Team agenda to ensure staff continue to learn together.
Richer views of learning behaviour development
In a nutshell… this is a timely programme with big ambitions
The programme combines a rich research heritage from Carole Dweck, Mihalyi Csikszentmihalyi, Art Costa, Sir Ken Robinson, Dylan Wiliam, Chris Watkins, John Hattie and Guy Claxton, and uses the EEf’s professional development principles in its structure. The programme unravels:
The formative work of finding out about your students’ learning behaviours;
The practical work of shifting classroom culture to better accommodate learning behaviours, using 4 foundational behaviours to get you started before broadening to 12;
The fine grained work of purposefully blending the use of learning behaviours into lesson design, focusing first on the 4 key behaviours across all subjects;
The blending work of gradually adding more of the original charted learning behaviours into the mix;
The skilled work of ensuring your own interventions generate your students’ growth as learners;
The monitoring work of recording and celebrating the growth of students’ learning behaviours.
The result… teachers will base their teaching around a learning growth framework and your students will knowingly grow as effective learners.
A development programme to help schools build better learners.
A successful education service is one that prepares young people for their future; that prepares them for, as the American educator Art Costa says, ‘not just for a life of tests, but for the tests of life’.
Are we preparing our students for a lifetime of learning?
Can our students become better learners?
How can we enable students to take more responsibility for their own learning?
This resource offers you glimpses of a powerful, new online programme; a programme designed to guide schools in gradually shifting their learning culture, and in so doing, build their students as better learners. It explores what can actually happen, on the ground, in real schools, to cultivate fresh, robust practices.
Finding what you need…
Section 1Leadership concerns raises seven important Leadership Questions that you and your senior team will want to consider in taking on this programme
Section 2Sustaining the journey describes various ways we are able to support your school in both making a start and moving through the programme.
Section 3 Overview of the online programme offers and overview of the design features of the whole programme
Section 4 Inside ‘Playing the learning Power Game’ explains the purpose, focus and expectations of Phase 1 of the programme.
Section 5 Inside ‘The Professional Learning Power Game’ explains how Phase 2 helps teachers to deepen their understanding of teaching for better learning.
A successful education service is one that prepares young people for their future; that prepares them for, as the American educator Art Costa says, ‘not just for a life of tests, but for the tests of life’.
Do you agree?
To do this well needs a thoughtful appreciation of what the future is going to be like and an understanding of the knowledge, skill and habits of mind necessary to face those challenges. This means helping students to build up the mental, emotional, and social resources to enjoy challenge and cope well with uncertainty and complexity.
What do you think?
If teaching is to have a future it must be teaching for the future. It must be sophisticated, flexible and focused, beyond the transmission of knowledge.
Does this sound about right?
Some years ago change was in the air…
‘Schools today need to be educating not just for exam results but for lifelong learning. To thrive in the twenty-first century, it is not enough to leave school with a clutch of examination certificates. Students need to have learnt how to be tenacious and resourceful, imaginative and logical, self-disciplined and self-aware, collaborative and inquisitive. No matter how much we teach our students, if we extinguish the passion for learning that young children bring to school, we will have failed’.
Guy Claxton. Emeritus Professor of Learning Sciences, University of Winchester Centre for Real World Learning.
…backed up by research
An enthusiasm for improved teaching to aid ‘better learning’ has motivated teachers for a long time.
In attempts to help students learn more or learn better, teachers tried to understand learning styles, multiple intelligences, and the like. In attempts to help students improve their organisation of knowledge or the effectiveness of their memory, teachers used tools like mind maps, mnemonics, and other study skills. Then we moved to the idea of removing stress levels to raise performance levels, but the focus was on how the teacher could ‘teach’ better.
When we found out just how learnable learning is we realised there’s a place for developing how we learn. Research uncovered some dimensions or energies or powers that can be used to shape how we learn. They could shape, for example, the growth of our resilience in learning, our learning relationships, our thinking skills and how we manage our learning.
This understanding has laid the ground for a deeper, more permanent set of approaches that aim is to get beyond learning more, or learning better, to helping students to help themselves become better learners.
” I can’t think of anything more worth learning than learning to learn. It’s like having money in the bank at compound interest” David Perkins. Project Zero, Harvard University.
…that uncovered the hidden dimensions of learning
Sadly many girls still believe that ‘Maths isn’t for girls’ and some students think that ‘If you can’t solve it in a minute, you can’t solve it at all’ or that ‘Bright people never have to try’. All these erroneous ideas cause students to be disposed to give up easily, to feel stupid, to feel disengaged. Think of ‘dispositions’ as indicators of the degree to which one is disposed to make use of a skill or knowledge.
Underlying this approach is a recognition that learning how to learn involves more than skills, it involves students attitudes, values, interests and beliefs as well. It’s about helping students to help themselves to be disposed to persist, to question and be curious, to collaborate harmoniously and to be open to new ideas.
The good thing is that these dispositions, inherent in all of us, are not fixed at birth. They can be developed by all of us regardless of ‘ability’, social background or age. Extending our learning power has no limits.
We need to move from thinking about learning as a set of techniques and skills that can be ‘trained’, to a set of dispositions, interests and values that need to be ‘cultivated’. Ron Richhart.
‘Dispositions to learning should be key performance indicators of the outcomes of schooling. Many teachers believe that, if achievement is enhanced, there is a ripple effect to these dispositions. However, such a belief is not defensible. Such dispositions need planned interventions.’
John Hattie, Visible Learning
But there’s still a disconnect…
The problem is there’s a disconnect between education systems and the increasingly complex needs of the 21st Century. Students need the exam results AND a set of generic skills, attitudes and habits to deal with complexity; an approach to learning that includes the disposition to be curious, inquisitive, experimental, reflective and sociable.
If you strip away political dogma, the evidence is overwhelming that this aim is not currently being achieved for very many students. We need to talk about values and purposes – beyond test scores, exam grades and university entrance. What is it that most young people are likely to need to know, be able to do and be like, in order to lead a fulfilling life in the 21st century?
…So now influential voices are becoming louder
‘An education that effectively prepares young people for life in the 21st century has to be about more than what a government says should be in the national curriculum. What students know about the traditional school subjects is important, but their dispositions, how they react to challenges and frustrations, what they believe about people who hold different opinions and beliefs from their own, their determination to do good in the world, these are arguably much more important.’
Dylan Wiliam Emeritus Professor of Educational Assessment, UCL Institute of Education, London
And urgent…
“Educational improvement should not just be about racking up test scores and getting more poor kids to Oxford; our ambition should be far greater than that alone. It is about rearing millions of youngsters who naturally think critically, creatively and collectively about the world in which they find themselves, find or devise work that is fulfilling and responsible and strive to make the world a better safer place.”
Guy Claxton, Emeritus Professor of Learning Sciences, University of Winchester Centre for Real World Learning.
and all it takes is for schools to recognise that . . .
learning how to learn involves attitudes, values, interests and beliefs
developing better learners is done with and by learners rather than to learners
learning involves cultivating dispositions and values rather than training skills
learning is not an inevitable by-product of ‘traditional effective teaching’
this approach is about making students ready and willing as well as able to learn
to achieve the goal of cultivating a learning character, the teacher’s pedagogical style is of central importance.
You are currently in Leading.. Playing the Learning Power Game
Use the navigation bar to move from section to section.
About Section 5 – Inside The Professional Learning Power Game
In the second phase of the Building Better Learners programme the focus is on broadening and strengthening a richer range of learning behaviours and making it more impactful.
The Professional Learning Power Game consists of thirteen online units, all but one of which explore one learning behaviour in greater depth: how to develop and grow it over time. The units can be undertaken in any order and you can spend as long as you need to implement them in classrooms.
Four units which deepen the four behaviours introduced in Phase 1
Putting perseverance into learning
Putting questioning into learning
Putting collaboration into learning
Putting revising into learning
A further eight units which broaden and deepen students’ learning behaviours
Putting noticing into learning
Putting making links into learning
Putting imagining into learning
Putting reasoning into learning
Putting capitalising into learning
Putting listening into learning
Putting planning into learning
Putting meta-learning into learning
And one unit Reviewing our Progress that offers tools to review and evaluate progress in terms of classroom culture and student learning behaviours.
You are now in section 5. Inside ‘The Professional Learning Power Game‘.
About Phase 2. The Professional Learning Power Game
1.Tailor the course to your school
There is no recommended order.
Highly effective learners have a wide range of learning dispositions and skills, but this doesn’t mean all 12 learning behaviours are of equal importance. Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration and Revising for example, formed the vital bedrock of Phase 1 on which other behaviours can now be successfully grafted. Some behaviours are exercised more frequently in some subjects than in others, so the blend of behaviours essential for being a scientist may differ from the blend for a linguist, or an artist etc. Secondary teachers in particular may well be attracted to the learning behaviours that figure most frequently in their own subject areas.
Equally, the existing learning strengths and weaknesses of your students should inform the decisions you make – if you are aware that Listening, for example, is a weakness that shows up in the majority of your students’ learning profiles, why would you not choose to start there?
The intention is that schools choose their own personalised route through these units in light of their unique circumstances.
2. Deepen learning behaviours
If you take a hard look at perseverance you’ll notice it’s about keeping going in the face of difficulties; channelling the energy of frustration productively; knowing what a slow and uncertain process learning often is. A mature learner understands that real learning requires effort and persistence, relishes opportunities to struggle with challenge, and believes that with effort they can become a more effective learner. This captures what we want all learners to become so there’s more to it than you might have thought.
The charts in Phase 2 endeavour to pick up this deeper level of detail; take perseverance for example….
Take a look at the chart…
Perseverance is about the way we stick at things even when they are difficult. It’s one of the most useful but neglected learning behaviours. What makes us able to persevere more and more usefully? We think several things come into play here. How you are willing and able to deal with being stuck, how you are able to manage distractions and manage the learning environment, how you relate to a challenge and whether you are influenced by goals whether they be your own or imposed by others. All these things contribute to being able to persevere. And of course there’s your own little voice of self-awareness: what you say to yourself and how this influences your beliefs and values.
Being perseverant grows and builds when it’s nurtured and supported. Furthermore, being perseverant involves gaining control of a range of linked skills and emotions.
The other 11 learning behaviours in phase 2 have their own, richer progression charts. These guide teachers to better understand and coach the complex states and stages of development.
Take a look at how progression in Perseverance might grow across five components.
In Phase 2 we introduce progression charts for teachers so giving them a sense of their own journey as a learning power coach. When we witnessed this development journey in teachers we found it was more complex than you might think! That’s why we captured the journey’s steps and laid a path for others to follow.
Teacher growth is coupled to student growth
The teacher growth chart is progressive – each step builds on the preceding one, each step needs to be attended to before further ones are attempted. But in making this progression teachers need to consider carefully where their students are as learners – they really do need to;
start from where students are,
Rather Than
from where they themselves want to be.
This is because teachers’ practice will be constrained by their students’ dispositions, skills and understandings of their learning. In Phase 2 you will findbroad learner growth charts (shown here in blue) linked to teacher growth charts (green).Teachers are advised to shape their practice one step ahead of their learners’ practice, then wait for their learners to ‘catch up’. Students need time to discern, understand and act on changes the teacher is causing them to make.
A classroom where the teacher is performing at or near the top of their growth trajectory while their learners are languishing near the bottom of their growth trajectories would be totally inappropriate and ineffective – there’s little point in changing teaching practice if it doesn’t impact on learners’ dispositions. Where learners sit on this ‘blue’ trajectory is a useful indicator of the presence and impact of the ‘green’ teacher interventions. Something’s amiss if there is not a fairly close match.
A delicate combination of teacher development and student progression
Teachers keep a step ahead enabling students to play catch-up
4. Review your Progress
This one off unit is designed to enable you to review your progress so far. You can use it at any suitable points in the programme.
The unit offers a rich variety of tools to help you review your progress in developing a learning culture in your classrooms. This review will provide you with information to guide or adapt your approach. Sections 1–4 consider:
Reflecting on your changing practice. Looking at what you have done and how your classroom has changed. This section answers the question “How far have we come?”
Giving students a voice. Finding out how your students have benefited. This section answers the question “How well have our students taken to this way of learning?”
Learning with and from colleagues. Learning from learning walks and observations. This section answers the question “What are the variations on the theme and what can we learn from these variations?”
Team session: Learning together. Putting your heads together and thinking “What next?” This team session answers the questions “How are we doing, how are our students doing and where do we need to go next?”
5. Unit structure — e.g. Putting Imagining into Learning.
Each unit is designed to guide teachers through a process of building the habit in their students. Sections 1–4 consider:
Imagining and how it develops. Includes an Imagining Progression Chart. Unpicks the meaning of Imagining, how it develops over time and how to use the Imagining chart to plot where students are now;
Taking Imagining into classroom culture. Includes effective classroom activities. This section offers numerous suggestions to develop a learning-friendly culture and build students’ learning skills. Here you will find ideas for lesson starters and quick wins; classroom activities; learning reflection tools; ideas for the appropriate learning language for each phase of progression in Imagining;
Blending learning habits with content. Example dual focused lesson. This section suggests a series of questions and steps teachers might use to design imagining into lessons. Here we look closely at how to blend improving students’ Imagination with the content you have to teach. The section covers: Six principles behind any learning powered lesson; Big questions to ask about lesson design; Lesson planning in action: an exemplar Imagining-focused task;
Team reflection and planning. Teachers share the impact of their experiments with colleagues and plan what they need to do next. It gives a skeleton plan for the Professional Learning Team session and includes downloadable enquiry questions and planning formats. In team sessions teachers are invited to share the impact of their experiments with colleagues, discuss the online materials, and plan how they might use these to change your practice.
A richer view of imagining
6. Support for senior leaders and/or learning champions
This complementary resource takes a leadership perspective for Phase 2 of developing students’ learning power. It’s designed to offer you as a leader a view of the strategic concerns that will arise when the school takes on ‘The Professional Learning Power Game‘
It offers some hard questions, think pieces, development frameworks and monitoring and review tools to help leaders:
feel reassured about the purpose, benefits and frameworks for Phase 2;
explore important leadership roles when supporting the deepening of Learning Power throughout the school;
maintain momentum into the future;
understand significant shifts in ways of working as teachers’ skills develop in the latter stages.
These strategic issues are considered over 5 sections:
Overview and an outline of the Phase 2 programme for staff;
Key messages of learning power distilled;
Leadership strategies to ensure success including;
Recognising the real life value of learning behaviours;
Expanding classroom learning cultures;
Reshaping curriculum delivery using a wide range of behaviours;
Expanding the range of learning behaviours used;
Evaluating the schools vision;
Learning from looking;
Carrying the messages to parents;
Keeping an eye on progress;
Where now? What next?
7. Costs and benefits
The Professional Learning Power Game offers material that ensures a deep consolidation of the whole Building Better Learners programme. A benefit to the school and its students for years to come.
We’ve borrowed this cost benefit analysis from a school that has been working with learning power for some time. The depth of the learning behaviour charts in Phase 2 gave them far greater insight into learning and how it could be utilised by the curriculum itself. So the various professional learning teams across the school became research teams. Here they didn’t just research and perfect their own practice but took a wider angle look at the curriculum and lesson delivery and how learning behaviours could be built in at curriculum planning level alongside types of retrieval practice and the interleaving content.
Looking at learning behaviour progression influenced how both the curriculum and individual lessons changed. It led teachers to re-evaluate how their subject delivery might be made even more learning and learner focused. Classrooms have become very alive with learning.
Note that any benefit side of this type of analysis will take time to build. However, the different types of benefits provides a useful view of what the school wants to see happen as a result of the staff development efforts. It’s a valuable set of goals.
You are now in section 5. Inside ‘The Professional Learning Power Game’.
In this section we give you a flavour of the content of Playing the Learning Power Gamewhich is Phase 1 of the programme. This phase is expected to take a school about a year to work through, but many of the resources are rich enough; to be useful and returned to year after year.
The programme is made up of four units:
Unit 1 introduces learning journey charts for 12 behaviours and invites teachers to translate charts into learning profiles for their students;
Unit 2 concentrates on the culture of the classroom and how small tweaks in teachers’ behaviours can benefit students’ learning behaviours. The emphasis is on just four learning behaviours; perseverance, questioning, collaboration and revising;
Unit 3 purposefully explores how the curriculum itself provides the need for specific learning behaviours to be used and how this then shapes lesson planning;
Unit 4 begins to branch out to a further eight learning behaviours offering a staged way of introducing them to students.
You are now in section 4. Inside ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
This on-line programme aims to help you to discover your students’ learning behaviours and, with that knowledge, enable you to fashion your classroom culture and teaching methodology to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
The big ambition of Phase 1.
This chart shows the big ambition of the programme. It distils what it’s all about.
the cells in yellow capture what leaders, teachers and learners will need to do across each row:
tracking the growth of learning behaviours;
adapting classroom cultures to strengthen 4 key learning behaviours;
adapting how the curriculum is delivered in order to build 4 key learning behaviours;
experimenting with and expanding the number of learning behaviours consciously being used by students;
the blueboxes capture the outcomes such changes could make to classrooms; cultures and curriculum delivery.
the greenboxes capture the anticipated outcomes for people; leaders, teachers and learners.
The vertical axis to the left shows the 4 main aims or thrusts of the programme. These four components involve:
Unit 1. The formative work of finding out about your students’ learning behaviours and how they have the potential to improve/grow;
Unit 2. The practical work of shifting classroom culture to better accommodate learning behaviours, using 4 foundational learning behaviours to get you started;
Unit 3. The practical work of purposefully blending the use of learning behaviours into lesson design, again focusing on just four foundational behaviours;
Unit 4. The work of gradually bringing more of the original researched learning behaviours into play in order to build students’ use of them over time. This is in preparation for the Phase 2 programme.
The horizontal axis across the top shows the 3 main groups of players in the game and what they will need to do to make it all work.
The central 12 cells
These cells serve 2 purposes. Firstly:
The text in each cell gives an indication of who needs to do what, in very broad terms, at each stage of this journey;
When looked at vertically down the page, they map out the 4 stages of this first part of the learning power journey;
When looked at horizontally across the page, they show the players in the game and how what they do needs to interact.
The cells to the bottom and to the right
The green cells across the bottom give an outline of how the school’s players will have developed by the time you have finished this first stage programme. The blue cells to the far right give an indication of the anticipated outcomes for each part of the journey from; discovering students learning behaviours, to shifts in classroom cultures, to early shifts in lesson design accommodating learning behaviours, and to the beginning of consciously using a much broader range of learning behaviours across the curriculum.
About Unit 1
Three basic frameworks
The early sections of Unit 1 offer a swift and illustrated read about how the learning power approach has been researched over time and its now three foundational models or frameworks…the learning behaviours (the warp of learning, shown as a brain diagram), the teaching behaviours that ensure their use (the weft of learning, shown here as a palette) and the phases of progression which add intent and purpose to every students’ journey (shown in charts).
Developing students’ Learning Power could be seen as the warp and weft of learning, a tapestry of activities on the part of both teachers and learners. The warp of Learning Power is made up of the learning behaviours you want students to develop. These are developed and woven together by the weft of all the different methods that a teacher has at their disposal. In recent years this development journey has moved from being a broad outline to one with identifiable progression stages. This means that the language teachers use; the explicit attention they pay to the ‘how’ of learning; the activities they make available, and how these are framed for students are now positively designed to enable students’ progress in the development of their learning habits. Teachers are enabled to look at their own students through the progression charts of learning power and use these to focus how they build the learning behaviours.
Unit 1 gives teachers opportunities and encouragement to;
discover and understand what ‘good learners’ tend to be like
take a look at themselves through a learning behaviour lens
tentatively consider the learning behaviours of a couple of students
remind themselves of how learning behaviours progress
In getting to grips with the growth of learning power teachers take a personal look at themselves as a learner and the learning behaviours they tend to use. This self-analysis results in a learning profile showing their learning strengths and the behaviours they find tricky and would like to improve. This sets the stage for teachers to begin profiling their students before moving on to Unit 2. Discovering and recording this data is likely to take a couple of months.
The 2 original frameworks…the learning brain and the teachers’ palette
Now given purposeful progression routes.
About Unit 2. Classroom culture
The second unit takes a look at the culture of the classroom and enables teachers to try out a range of ideas that have been found to work well in improving learners’ disposition to learning. It is expected staff will spend about 3 months working on this, but they are likely to keep returning to it over time.
Developing three aspects of classroom culture
In Unit 2 teachers are enabled to explore their work through three aspects of the Teachers’ Palette framework – Relating to, Talking about and Celebrating learning behaviours. They then go on to trying out and using a range of teaching ideas linked to the 4 key learning behaviours – Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration and Revising.
We start with these four behaviours because with Perseverance teachers find that it’s this disposition to keep going, to remain engaged, to relish challenge and strive for goals that’s most lacking in many students. Questioning because this is the driver of learning; wanting to know why, how, if, when and so forth connects us with learning. Collaboration because ‘working together’ is a familiar classroom activity and yet few students know how best to learn profitably together.Revising because learning is a process and like any process it needs managing and adapting to work really well. This foundational set of four offer the soil in which other dispositions can take root more easily.
The content builds on what teachers have discovered about their students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1 and offers interventions tailored to particular levels of learner development across the four learning behaviours. The suggested changes in practice include;
enabling students to take increasing responsibility for their own development. i.e. students asking more of the questions, monitoring their own learning or making more choices
moving away from ‘telling’ whenever possible and adopting the role of coach
showing yourself as a learner by modelling your thought process and displaying uncertainty
encouraging students to pay attention to how they are learning, to slow down and notice steps they are using
finding ways to notice and celebrate learning behaviour growth
showing how… mistakes can become learning opportunities; difficulty is when learning happens; struggle is to be expected; asking questions shows curiosity not a lack of intelligence; effort not just talent is what leads to success
displaying the process of learning by showing first attempts, revisions, failed lines of enquiry. What you choose to display tells students a lot about what you truly believe: displaying/praising only the finished article suggests that whatever we might say, we are more interested in the outcome than in the process.
These ideas and more are offered as a catalogue of teaching ideas, clustered into the 4 foundational learning behaviours (the columns) and differentiated by the phases of learner development (the rows). This builds on what teachers discovered about their students’ learning characteristics in Unit 1. Now their interventions can be tailored to particular levels of learner development.
Here teachers will consult their class profile, consider which of the four learning behaviours need most encouragement and begin to edge these into the culture of their classroom.
Here’s just one example of the sort of practical ideas teachers will find in the catalogue. It’s an idea to help perseverance (and questioning) edge from Purple to Blue stage (from ‘Show me’ or ‘tell me’ to ‘I’ll try’) in the learning chart.
Make students aware of how they will be learning
Share learning behaviours with students
Some primary schools have found it useful and effective to share an overview plan of a couple of learning behaviours that they will be using during a week. Here the information is captured on a large poster which remains on the classroom wall throughout the week.
The teacher tends to share an overview of learningfor the week … decimals … poems … ball skills and then explores which learning behaviours willreally help with this content. If the class is not at this level of discussion theteacher provides brief explanations of the behaviours.
The bottom box on the poster captures theresult of a class/group discussion of howthe habits had been used and what students hadfound out to take forward in using them next time.
About Unit 3. Constructing Learning
Taking a deeper look at learning
This Unit is possibly the one many teachers need most. It helps them to answer the question ‘how can I introduce questioning into my lessons?’ or ‘what does a learning powered lesson look like?’ or ‘how does all this fit together across the curriculum?’ It is expected staff will initially spend about 3 months working on this, but they are likely to keep returning to harvest ideas from this unit over time.
Unit 3 concentrates on the focal point in the Teachers’ Palette framework, Constructing,where classroom culture meets curriculum culture. What can teachers do with a given curriculum to ensure it is ‘taught’ or perhaps ‘learned’ in a way that will enhance and strengthen students’ learning behaviours? It’s about direct teaching, curriculum design and planning lessons. It’s about looking at the curriculum in general and thinking about how to infuse learning behaviours into it. It’s about thinking and planning schemes of work or day to day lessons to ensure students consciously use and improve their learning behaviours. It’s about how teachers handle the day to day, hour by hour stuff that enables students to understand themselves as learners. It’s about making learning power come alive across the curriculum.
Section 3A considers the transition from content-only planning through to curriculum planning that integrates progression in content with progression in learning behaviours. This aspect of the programme is of particular interest to senior managers.
Section 3B considers how teachers might plan a unit of work and then just one lesson to ensure learning behaviours are firmly embedded. In fact without the use of learning behaviours the plan would be unsuccessful. It looks at the stages of filling in blank unit plans. It looks at possible must haves and top tips for planning a worthwhile lesson. Teachers will find all sorts of tips, formats and examples to get them going.
Section 3C explores different types of learning activities and the learning behaviours that they stimulate. Activities come in all shapes and sizes – some are highly structured by the teacher others encourage learners to engage in independent enquiry.
Section 3D. Here teachers will find a unique catalogue of activities to explore. It has over 100 ideas that they might blend into their lesson designs. These ideas are organised into 4 categories for each of the 4 foundational learning behaviours. The 4 categories are:
Visible Thinking Routines – to activate each of these learning behaviours;
Classroom Activities – to strengthen each of these learning behaviours;
Monitoring Strategies – for checking how each of these learning behaviours are developing;
Exemplar Lessons – A lesson plan that integrates each of the four learning behaviours into a complete lesson.
It’s a must-have pick and mix. Expect staff to come back to it frequently.
Putting ideas into practice… a Visible Thinking Routine
This VTR helps students to reflect on how and why their thinking/understanding is changing.
Remind students of the topic you have been working on. Ask them to respond to each of the sentence stems: I used to think…, Now, I think…
Alternatively ask students to write down their views at the beginning of a topic. Invite them to revisit & update their answer during and at the end in light of what has been learned.
Or, at the beginning of a lesson ask students to write down what they understand by a particular term that will be explored in the coming lesson (e.g. Phrase (English); Proof (Maths); Power (Science) etc). At the end of the lesson, ask them to write down what they now understand by the term.
About Unit 4. Broadening the range
This unit offers teachers an opportunity to spread their wings and begin to work across the other eight learning behaviours. It has eight small sections, each based on one learning behaviour – Noticing; Making Links; Reasoning; Imagining; Capitalising; Listening; Planning; Meta Learning.
For each of the eight behaviours teachers are offered example activities for a staged way of introducing the behaviour by:
Firstly… making students aware of the use and importance of a habit…when, where, why, how they could be using it;
Then... exploring the learning habit a little more through its language;
Try... using the behaviour as a lesson starter to tune students into using it;
Then start... blending the behaviour into the way teachers teach content, using specific strategies to deepen content understanding;
Ensure… students reflect on the success or otherwise of their new frame of mind as a result of consciously using the behaviour.
The content of this section encourages teachers to play with introducing more learning behaviours.
This Unit offers an effective preparation for Phase 2.
You are now in section 4. Inside ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’.
Building Better Learners is a whole-school programme for all your educational staff, that looks afresh at learning itself from both the learner and teacher perspectives. It aims to enable teachers to learn and work together in the shared endeavour of building their students’ lifelong learning behaviours.
This endeavour isn’t simply a matter of staff reading and absorbing the online ideas, trying out a couple, seeing what happens and wondering whether it worked. It’s a longer, slower, more particular process that relies on a symbiotic relationship between the online material and how this is supported by the school. The programme is:
reliably guided by research into learning;
built around three content models;
structured to support collaborative staff learning taking hold in the classroom;
evidenced in the tangibly improving student learning behaviours charts.
It offers a timely big ambition of enabling your students to become better lifelong learners; better prepared for an uncertain future.
Explore the big ideas that have shaped the what and how of the programme below and see more detail on the content of each phase of the programme in Sections 4 and 5.
You are now in section 1. Overview of Building Better Learners
Building Better Learners is a blended learning programme that aims to help teachers discover their students’ learning behaviours and use that knowledge to fashion their classroom culture and teaching methodologies to ensure students, knowingly, become better learners.
1.1 The foundations of the programme
Three models underpin the whole programme.
The Supple Learning Mind: the ‘Brain diagram’ describes the capacities that make up an individual student’s character as a learner
The Phases of Learning Growth describe the extent to which an individual learner uses each of their learning capacities,
The Teachers’ Palette describes four aspects of how a teacher creates a classroom culture in which learning will flourish.
These three models capture the What, the How well, and the How do we achieve it, of building better learners. They are described briefly below, and explained in more detail in Section 4.
Underpinning all of this is the idea that students who understand themselves as learners will become better learners faster and more readily.
Model 1. The Supple Learning Mind framework of high-value learning behaviours
A rich framework for learning
The Supple Learning Mind framework has four parts, embracing four domains of learning:
The Emotional domain of learning (sometimes called Resilience)
The Cognitive domain of learning (sometimes called Resourcefulness)
The Social domain of learning (sometimes called Reciprocity)
The Strategic domain of learning (sometimes called Reflectiveness)
This learning framework includes how we feel, how we think, how we learn with others and how we manage the process of learning. It provides a language that both helps teachers to think about how they cultivate each of the learning behaviours, and students to understand of how they can become more effective learners inside and beyond the classroom.
Each domain clusters together for or five high value learning behaviours. For example the social domain is made up of the learning behaviours of interdependence, collaboration, listening and empathy and imitation.
(The Supple Learning Mind framework was originally conceived and researched by Professor Guy Claxton, to capture the key psychological characteristics that enable people to learn and thrive in a complex world. These capacities are inherent in us all. They can be developed regardless of ‘ability’, social background or age.)
The whole point of building learning powers is to do just that, to build the learning behaviours, not simply to name them. The diagram alongside – Learning: Poles Apart – shows a start and finish of a journey to build students’ emotional, thinking, social learning habits plus their ability to manage the process of their learning.
Our understanding of what the journey might look like in practice has developed over the past seven years based on the stages of a journey ‘borrowed’ from Bloom’s taxonomy of the affective domain of learning. It is this scaling of the learning dispositions that increases teachers’ confidence and focuses their influence over time.
We’ve borrowed ideas from Benjamin Bloom’s Taxonomy of Objectives of the Affective Domain to generate a very condensed version of the five main phases of growth, namely:
Receiving. (purple)..which involves giving attention to something; becoming aware, not avoiding or rejecting it; being alert to something.
Responding. (blue)…which involves going beyond merely attending to actively attending; complying; taking more responsibility for and enjoyment in initiating action.
Valuing. (green)..which involves accepting the worth of something; preferring something; being committed to the value of something.
Organisation.(yellow)..which involves adding to, formulating and organising their values into how they live their life.
Embodies. (Characterisation in the original)(orange)…which involves behaving consistently in accordance with their values, living what they stand for.
We have simplified and applied these highbrow ideas to the affective development (emotional) of learning behaviours. We’ve also added a negative phase labelled Lacks where learners are unaware, show no interest in, avoid, or reject the learning behaviour.
Take a look at the phases shown above, but start at the bottom and work up.
We urge you to see this progression as long term.
Some phases may take years for people to work through.
Some will never be worked through or achieved.
None of the phases are inevitable.
There is a lifetime of development captured here.
Nevertheless your role as a teacher or parent should surely be to encourage and enable this journey.
It’s worth getting your head around the outline of these phases of development. They apply to any of the learning behaviours as we show in the toggle boxes as you scroll down.
Model 3. The Teachers’ Palette: learning-friendly strategies
As a teacher you can build young people’s learning power by helping them to expand their own learning capacities. This involves the ways in which you relate to students, talk to students, organise your classroom, and design activities, as well as what you notice and celebrate about learning
Making learning power work involves transforming the culture of the classroom. A common language for learning is adopted; staff shift responsibility for learning to students and model learning by sharing their own difficulties, frustrations and triumphs; students come to understand themselves as growing learners and consciously improve their learning habits; teachers assume the role of learning-power coach, offering students interesting, real and challenging activities to enable them to create their own knowledge and stretch their learning habits. Underpinning this is the obvious reality that students will only change their behaviours once their teachers have changed theirs’.
The culture of the classroom is determined by how teachers are, the relationships that exist between the teacher and the learners, the ways in which the teacher talks and what the teacher talks about, the extent to which teaching is designed to ensure both content acquisition and the development of learning behaviours, and the often subliminal messages about what the teacher really thinks is important.
These 4 aspects of culture – Relating, Talking, Constructing and Celebrating – form the basis of The Teachers’ Palette, the second of two key models in Building Learning Power.
Principles of effective professional development help structure the programme
While the online content of the programme provides teachers with the research and classroom ideas that work the ideas alone can’t bring about change in classrooms. There’s a long road between teachers ‘knowing’, teachers ‘doing’ and teachers ‘doing things differently’ which this programme is designed to support.
Teachers need support to ensure these ideas take root in classrooms so, our use of Professional Learning Teams, based on the work of Dylan Wiliam, is built into the very structure of the programme.
The programme is a careful blend of learning:
online learning units that… are available at any time, faithfully present researched content, are broken into manageable chunks and encourage the use of prior knowledge;
professional learning team sessions that……are strategically placed throughout the programme, provide a structured agenda to ensure effective meetings, offer social support with prompts for setting and agreeing learning goals, work as a forum for affirming and reinforcing progress;
trying things out in classrooms where…teachers follow their plans and monitor their actions because “learning by doing” is integral to the development of expertise and expertise needs ample opportunities for practice, reflection, and adjustment.
This trio of learning opportunities work together to help teachers replace long-standing habituated practices with more effective ones.
A combination of online content learning, learning with and from colleagues, and learning from small scale enquiries in classrooms.
1.2 What TLO provides
On-line programme for all teachers
The core component of Building Better Learners is an online programme designed to help teachers develop their understanding and use of Building Learning Power. The programme is presented in two phases, Playing the Learning Power Game (Phase 1) and The Professional Learning Power Game (Phase 2).
Each phase consists of a number of course units. These are intended to feed into a regular cycle of collaborative staff development by what we call professional learning teams. Each unit corresponds to either one or two meeting cycles.
The units in Phase 1 are designed to be taken in sequence. In Phase 2, the units are independent of each other and may be taken in any order.
The units are intended as live resources for teachers — individually, or perhaps as professional learning teams — to revisit and refer to throughout a school’s participation. Teachers have access to all the Phase 1 units for the full duration of the school’s involvement, and to Phase 2 units from the time that the school decides to make them available.
Online course material feeding into a a regular cycle of collaborative staff development
Online resources for school leaders
Each phase has an accompanying unit aimed at guiding school leaders in implementing the programme across the school:
Leading Playing the Learning Power Game, for Phase 1; and
Leading the Professional Learning Power Game, for Phase 2
Resources and live support for launching the programme
As preparation for the course, and indeed the whole programme, there is a choice of three ways of launching it.
‘Do It Yourself’: In school launch led by senior leaders using the comprehensive launch-related resources provided within Leading the Learning Power Game.
‘Zoom-assisted’ launch: this includes a small number of live virtual consultancy and training sessions, for both leadership staff and general teaching staff. Sessions are typically scheduled to last 75–90 minutes.
In-school launch by TLO trainers, typically a full school-closure day.
Optional additional resources and live support for the programme
Both phases of the core programme can be optionally augmented by further live virtual consultancy sessions, typically scheduled to last 75–90 minutes, and with associated resources. See section 2 for details.
Other items that may be helpful include the online BLP Activity Banks; the downloadable Learning Habits at a Glance cards; books and classroom posters. Information about all these can be found in the Publications section of the BLP website. As a client for the Building Better Learners programme you are entitled to a 20% discount on the website prices.
In particular, a standard but optional starter pack of printed publications — books, posters, etc. — is offered with Phase 1 of Building Better Learners.
1.3 Phase 1. Playing the Learning Power Game:a tight focused start
The programme introduces the holistic ideas of learning power and helps teachers adapt their classroom culture and lesson design in order to grow positive dispositions in four foundational learning behaviours: Perseverance, Questioning, Collaboration and Revising.
Five important features of Phase 1;
1. Phase 1 puts students’ learning behaviours (not attainment) front and centre in the school’s approach to improving learning, enabling teachers to become familiar with the underlying concepts of Learning Power. They gain insights into the 3 models of learning power – the strength and range of their students’ learning behaviours and the classroom culture that supports the growth of those learning behaviours – and record their students’ current learning behaviours. These student learning profiles offer teachers some of the most influential data they’ve ever had to shape their classroom practice.
2. To avoid overload and confusion the Phase 1 programme concentrates on developing the four foundational learning behaviours, one from each of the four domains of learning. Perseverance from the emotional domain, questioning from the cognitive domain, collaboration from the social domain and revising from the strategic domain of learning.
3. Phase 1 has four units and a suggested timetable for how these might be structured across a year. i.e.
Unit 1 two months, covers understanding and capturing students’ learning profiles, with one learning team meeting;
Unit 2 three months, covers the development of the learning culture, with two learning team meetings;
Unit 3 three months, covers the design of learning powered lessons, with two learning team meetings;
Unit 4 two months, encourages teachers to branch out and introduce more learning behaviours , with two learning team meetings.
4. The units contain rich catalogues of activities matched to levels of learner development. This means that teachers can use their interventions more carefully and raise students’ awareness of how they can take control and build their learning behaviours. It’s students’ learning profiles that guide teachers in designing their classroom culture. These rich catalogues are treasure troves that will see teachers returning to them again and again in years to come.
5. Towards the end of the phase Unit 4 encourages teachers to branch out and play with a couple of the next 8 behaviours shown in their student’s learning profiles. This will give teachers a feel for using other learning behaviours in preparation for Phase 2 of the programme and is so rich in content it could well run into year 2.
Learning Profiles
Catalogues of activities
Lesson designs
And when you’re ready to move on…
1.4 Phase 2. The Professional Learning Power Game: gradually broadening the impact
Having worked on introducing students to the foundational four learning behaviours, Phase 2 enables teachers to extend their classroom practice by working more deeply with a further 8 learning behaviours. Each of the twelve units contain more extensive descriptions of the behaviours themselves together with a rich bank of activities. The phase looks to marry curriculum design and the development of more sophisticated nuanced learning behaviours.
Four important features of Phase 2
1. It builds on data about students’ learning characteristics. You begin to see and record your students’ growth.
2. The materials in Phase 2 move beyond the experimental stage helping teachers to broaden and improve their skills. It offers a profile for teachers’ development so enabling them to manage their own journey.
3. It is infinitely flexible and the school chooses its own route. The twelve learning behaviour modules can be considered in any order, by anyone, to meet the needs of the school. You can go as quickly or a slowly as you want but to help you engage purposefully the online material will remain available to you for at least two years.
4. It is deeper, wider and even more fascinating than Phase 1. Of the thirteen units, four will deepen the four behaviours already introduced in Phase 1, while eight units will deepen the learning powers that were not considered in Phase 1. A further unit offers tools to review and evaluate progress in terms of classroom culture and student learning behaviours.
Each unit has a Professional Learning Team agenda to ensure staff continue to benefit from learning together.
Richer views of learning behaviour development
You are now in section 1. Overview of Building Better Learners
About Section 2. Launching and sustaining the journey
You may well be intrigued by many of the ‘learning power’ ideas but that’s a world away from introducing and supporting the programme over time.
So to ensure the success of the programme we can offer a range of unique pick and mix support packages for leaders and learning champions. You can shape your own support package to ensure it will be just right for your school and its budget. The support package will assist you with:
introducing the approach to staff (see section 1 below)
sustaining the smooth running of the whole endeavour (see section 2 below)
These two aspects of the support packages for Phase 1 of the programme are outlined below. It’s up to you to pick and mix them to suit your needs.
To ensure your programme makes a solid start we offer four different flavours of making a start.
A. Launching the programme yourself (DIY)
The DIY offer has resources you could use to introduce the programme to staff and others e.g. governors. There are slide decks, resource booklets and activities designed to enable you to put your own introductory training together for the programme as a whole and later for each unit of the programme. These resources don’t just amount to simple show and tell sessions – they are designed to provoke deep thinking about each aspect of the programme: its aims; learning and how it grows; the culture of the classroom; the design of lessons.
There are 5 slide decks:
Introducing ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ i.e. the whole programme
Introducing each of Units 1, 2, 3 and 4 in Phase 1
Each has a pack of resources containing;
a slide deck with notes
further explanatory / commentary notes
activities to deepen thinking
B. Launching the programme via Zoom
If you don’t feel comfortable enough to introduce the programme yourself you can request our assistance via Zoom training. The most popular time for such Zoom sessions has been after school on Tuesday, Wednesday or Thursdays. Talk with us about what’s convenient for your school.
The ‘Zoom introductory training’ pack consists of:
two 75 ish minute Zoom sessions, a couple of weeks apart
Online pre-session preparation packs, sent to each participant a week before each event, containing;
short pre-session introductory film, quizzes and activities to try
a resource booklet to download and print
the session timetable and its activities
two post session tasks to be completed fairly promptly
an overview description of the programme staff are about to embark on.
During these two sessions staff will come to understand their own students as learners and be ready to start on the programme at Phase 1 Unit 2.
C. Managing the programme via Learning Champions
Getting something new going evenly and consistently across a large school can be tricky. To overcome this many larger primary schools and secondary schools often prefer to spread the load of managing the programme. This can be done by identifying a group of staff, who we’ll call ‘Learning Champions’, who learn together by working their way through part of ‘Playing the Learning Power Game’ programme before using this experience to involve all staff. Thereafter they manage the Professional Learning Team sessions. This package includes a separate on-line resource especially for ‘Learning Champions’.
Learning Champions:
need a 3 month lead time to become familiar with ‘Playing the Learning Power Game‘ and the opportunity to iron out any practical problems. i.e. they start at least 3 months before the rest of the school
create practical experience of the approach within the school which can act as a ‘go to’ resource for other staff
offers senior leaders a significant group of teachers ready, willing and able to support / encourage others
The slides from the DIY package are also made available for this team.
D. Launching the programme with an in-school training day
Alternatively you might want to assign one of your 5 training days to launch the programme with staff. Such days at the beginning of terms are in very short supply and early booking would be essential. This in-school training day is designed to introduce staff to how students’ learning behaviours develop, how knowing that will influence the idea of learning friendly classrooms and their role as the teacher.
The four hour morning session knits together research based inputs with interactive analytical activities. These serve to encourage staff to consider their own teaching style, its impact in the classroom and what they might do to change this for the benefit of learning behaviours. From the start staff are encouraged to contribute their own learning habits to ensure the session is a rich learning opportunity for everyone.
The two hour afternoon session is reserved for the leadership team. Discussion concentrates on their role of supporting and managing the development of students’ learning characters, how this might affect classroom culture and curriculum design.
Each member of staff will use a richly illustrated resource book which will act as a reference text for months to come.
2. Support to keep things going smoothly
Both phases of the core programme can be optionally augmented by further live virtual consultancy sessions, typically scheduled to last 75–90 minutes, and with associated resources.
All the following support packages are conducted via Zoom sessions at times to suit schools.
1. Keeping it on track (leaders)
How it works.
This support package consists of three 75 minute Zoom sessionsfor leaders spread through the first year. These are scheduled to coincide with key Phase 1 milestones namely…
after the first couple of months when staff have completed their students’ learning profiles (e.g. start Nov), to ponder/discuss student profiles and what they reveal
three months later when teachers have had time to make shifts in their classroom culture and are about to start applying the ideas to curriculum/lesson plans (e.g. start March), to discuss progress in classroom culture.
three or four months later when staff are exploring more learning behaviours and preparing for phase two of the programme (e.g. start June), to discuss lesson design and steps to prepare for Phase 2.
Possible subjects include;
Managing our expectations
Highlights and concerns
Changing the focus of classroom observation
What are we learning from looking for learning?
Engaging parents with Learning Power
Tools to remind you of what you are looking for.
2. How’s it going? (teachers)
How it works
The emphasis of this support package is on teachers monitoring their own development. It consists of three 75 minute Zoom sessions for a group of about 8-10 teachers spread across the year. These can be scheduled to coincide with key Phase 1 milestones…
when staff have completed their students’ learning profiles.
when teachers have had time to make shifts in their classroom culture.
when staff are exploring more learning behaviours in preparation for phase two of the programme.
Possible subjects include;
What have we learned from students’ learning profiles?
Tools and techniques for observing learning power in lessons;
Designing lessons to enhance learning powers
Self-monitoring tools
3. Learning Champion support.
How it works
The Learning Champion route is aimed at larger schools. It’s important that this team itself feels supported and stretched. To enable this we have prepared a specialised on-line resource for the start of their journey; this is part of the package. Thereafter as Champions begin to lead learning teams across the school it’s important that support for them continues.
Possible subjects include;
Learning Champion support consists of five 75 minute Zoom conversations across 4 terms covering;
Becoming a team and the job to be done ( an introduction to the programme and their role)
Overcoming difficulties of drawing up student learning profiles (after a couple of months)
Lessons from becoming and developing as a team (things to take forward as they begin to lead other teams)
Keeping track and celebrating progress (things to be aware of or watch out for as teams progress)
Where to next? (an introduction to Phase 2 of the programme)
3. Dedicated leadership resources
Leading Playing the Learning Power Game and Leading The Professional Learning Power Game are on-line resources that support the leadership of the two phases of the programme.
Both are designed to offer you, as senior leaders, a view of the strategic concerns that will arise when the school takes on a whole school programme to develop powerful learners. They offer questions, think pieces, frameworks, slide decks, diagrams and monitoring tools to help leaders:
feel reassured about the purpose, benefits and frameworks of learning power;
explore important leadership roles when taking on the development of Learning Power through the school;
introduce units of the programme to staff;
maintain a secure momentum into the future;
understand ways forward beyond the initial stage;
monitor the progress and value of the whole enterprise.
Every school starting the programme will receive the Leading Playing the Learning Power Game resource. This will be customised to the specific variety of launch package the school has selected to meet their needs.
Taking the programme on board will inevitably raise some vital leadership questions:
From
how will the school benefit from this programme?
To
what changes to the school’s operations will need to be accommodated?
To help structure these management issues we’ve used the successful McKinsey 7-S Change Management Model to help schools structure their thinking to plan and implement organisational change.
In the section below we simply alert you to theleadership considerations that, when answered, will lay the foundations of success.
It’s worth taking a few minutes to reflect on these 7 leadership aspects and how they might apply to your school. Sorting out the answers will lay the foundations of success.
Further help is at hand. Over the years we have learned that it’s the leadership and management of development programmes that has the greatest influence on their success. Hence, as part of the programme, we now include detailed consideration of the 7 leadership aspects for both Phase 1 and 2 in separate leadership modules. These are outline, and suggest some answers to all of the leadership considerations necessary for the successful implementation of ‘Building Better Learners’
Just raising, not answering, the vital leadership questions.
1. How does this programme fit with our school values?
Having met an outline of the programme earlier the first questions you will want to muse on are:
How does ‘Building Better Learners’ fit with our school’s ethos?
Will this programme strengthen our values and organisation?
How will we ensure stakeholders buy in to it?
Shared values govern any school’s health and when implementing change the expectation is often that teachers will change/adapt their teaching behaviours. As research has made clear this is only possible where there’s a change culture together with real, lived school values. Taking on the values of ‘Building Better Learners‘ is about preparing students for a lifetime of learning; to enable students to get better at learning; to empower them to lead a productive lifetime of learning. When considering all the questions below, they should all be seen to fit with your school’s values. Shared values is not so much a place to start but the one that will have a guiding influence over all your other questions.
2. What sort of skills/competencies does the programme enhance?
Having thought about how the programme fits with school values your next questions may well revolve around staff and learner competencies, wondering how you can gauge what your classroom cultures and students’ learning behaviours are really like now?
You may want to muse on:
What are our students’ learning behaviours like now?
What are our classroom cultures like now?
Of course the programme helps you both ask and answer such questions but here are a couple of short questionnaires to point you in a realistic direction to kick start your thinking.
3. How could we accommodate the staff development approaches suggested?
If you’ve mused on the skills and competencies that the programme will enhance you might then wonder how you go about enhancing staff skills. There are staff development approaches embedded in the programme so you may want to consider:
Could we manage the suggested staff development?
What’s the best way to organise the development of staff across the school?
How will we achieve high levels of engagement with the programme?
The way that the school decides to organise staff to engage with the programme and learn together impacts heavily on its success. Hence how the programme will be led, who will lead it, and how it will be resourced in terms of directed time become essential questions. As such, these decisions that will inform many aspects of the strategy.
4. How do we prevent it becoming a workload issue?
Of course the school has all sorts of instructions for how staff need to go about completing certain tasks and processes to ensure all runs smoothly. However, when thinking about changing your school’s systems, it’s sometimes necessary to assess the different types of project management and workflows that are currently in place. You might want to ask yourself:
How will we prevent the programme becoming a workload issue for teachers, support staff, the programme lead, and senior leaders?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for ongoing engagement with the online learning aspects of the programme?
What will need to be changed to create the necessary directed time for the programme related meetings?
The programme requires participants to engage with the online materials, plan and implement small scale learning enquiries, and reflect on the impact of developments with colleagues. So teacher workload and a consideration of directed time will be pertinent. You cannot will the ends without willing the means.
5. Who will lead it and what accountability may be needed?
Clear chains of command avoid chaos & confusion and the school will have a simple structure because it creates a sense of accountability within the school. But in taking on the programme you may like to consider:
Who will lead this change strategy and what accountability may be needed in the system?
How will the programme leader keep senior leaders informed of developments?
How will senior leaders support the programme leader?
Might the programme be managed by a seasoned T&L specialist, someone outside the current leadership team, could we need several learning champions, will we need a written job description….and so on. Remember – it is a false economy to invest in the programme itself but neglect making adequate provision for its leadership.
6. How are we going to support the programme?
Leadership and Management behaviour patterns
The school will have its own leadership / management styles and indeed it is this style that often decides the level of staff productivity and satisfaction in an organisation. Hence you will have been wondering:
How will we, as leaders, create the conditions where teachers are encouraged to take risks, to try things out, to fail in safety?
How will leaders demonstrate an ongoing interest in the enquiries that teachers are undertaking?
[Here, ‘leaders’ includes members of the senior leadership team and the programme lead (if not an SLT member).]
Flawless execution of tried and tested teaching routines is at odds with a programme that intentionally seeks to help teachers to adjust their classroom practice to focus more explicitly on growing students’ learning behaviours. Supporting innovation will involve dialogue and enabling of exploration. ‘Permission to act’ needs to be devolved to teachers and leaders will need to show interest in teachers’ ‘learning enquiries’.
7. How do we expect it all to work? How will we create a plan to pull all this together?
The purpose and organisation of the change
The ‘Building Better Learners’ programme is a strategy and will have a place in the school’s plan to implement change and so gain improved outcomes for students. A well-crafted strategy will draw together the answers from the other six questions dealt with above. You may find yourself musing on:
What is our strategy for implementing ‘Building Better Learners’?
Is the plan sufficiently detailed to show time frames, responsibilities of key players, monitoring checkpoints, contingencies, funding/time implications?
It would be wise to consider how your plan will inform your Self Evaluation form – describe what you are Intending to achieve and how you plan to Implement it. The Impact of these plans will be evidenced by ongoing monitoring as the programme develops over the next year or so.